JP7195682B1 - Gaming systems and gaming machines - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine or the like capable of efficiently performing communication between a main control section, a dedicated unit, and a game point control section, and determining whether or not communication between the dedicated unit and the game point control section is normal. It is in. SOLUTION: A main control unit 100 controls a credit control unit 165 in a state where the number of game medals is 1, a state where the number of game medals is 2, a state where the number of game medals is 3 to 14999, and a state where the number of game medals is 15000 to 16368. Either the state or the state where the number of game medals is 16369 or more is recognized. The credit control unit 165 monitors the state of the sandwich device 300 and determines whether or not there is a VL abnormality (unit communication abnormality) in the I/F signal shared power supply. is set to 1 and transmitted to the main control unit 100 together with the VL return waiting flag. Waiting for VL recovery is a flag indicating that VLON has not been detected even once after the power is turned on. Even if VL is abnormal, if VLON has not been detected even once, it is not regarded as a VL error. [Selection drawing] Fig. 116

Description

The present invention provides a pachislot machine that uses medals and coins as a game medium, a pachinko machine that uses pachinko balls as a game medium, and substitute coins called electronic data or tokens (game values, The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine (rotary-type gaming machine) in which a game is played with a game value).

The present invention also provides a program (for example, game software) in which control steps or control procedures for realizing the game method are recorded in an information storage medium such as a semiconductor memory, memory stick, HD (hard disk), or Blu-ray disc. ) itself.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, games using a reel-type game machine called a pachislot machine have been actively played in conventional pachinko halls and pachislot halls. There is also a reel-type game machine called Pachilot (or Parrot) that performs the above-described reel-type game using pachinko balls used in a pachinko machine (ball-type game machine) as game media. In video game machines such as amusement facilities, and personal computers and game machines in general households via the Internet, substitute coins called tokens (that is, "game media") are used to play reel-type games. A simulation game simulating the In the near future, it is planned that game values such as electronic data and tokens equivalent to these will be recorded on IC cards and used for games without using medals or coins. (So-called medalless game machines).

For example, in the normal game of the above-described reel-type gaming machine, when the player operates the start lever after inserting a predetermined number of game medals (game media or tokens), a bonus, a plurality of small wins, or replays are performed at that timing. An internal lottery (also referred to as “internal lottery”) for a combination (replay) is executed, and a plurality of drums (mostly three or four reel drums) are rotated from top to bottom to Starting a variable display game in which a plurality of patterns displayed (drawn) on the torso (usually, the plurality of patterns are drawn on a reel tape and attached to each drum) is changed, When a player operates a stop button corresponding to each drum and a predetermined combination of symbols such as a bell, watermelon, cherry, etc., which are internally won small prizes, is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the player wins, and one or more. While about 15 game medals are paid out, when the replay pattern is displayed on the effective line and replay (replay) is activated, no game medals are inserted (or the number of game medals inserted in the previous game is inserted as it is. ) to enter a replay state in which the next normal game can be played.

In particular, according to the result of the internal lottery of the normal game, a bonus combination (one or two types of special role continuous operation device) is internally elected, and a specific pattern (for example, 7 red patterns or 7 blue patterns) is drawn by stopping the reel drum. A big bonus game mode (BB game mode: continuation of characters) is the most advantageous game mode for the player when the characters are stopped and displayed on the effective line (an effective line is a straight line or an irregular line). Actuator), you can get a lot of game medals at once. In addition, when a regular bonus (a kind of special accessory) is won and bar patterns as specific patterns are aligned on the effective line, a regular bonus game (RB game) is executed, and although it is far from the BB game, In any event, the player's greatest interest in the reel-type game is to establish these bonus games. As a result of executing the internal lottery, when the bonus game is won or released, a bonus flag is set and stored in a data storage area such as RAM or RWM, so that predetermined specific symbols (7 symbols, bars, etc.) The flag is carried over to subsequent variable display games until the symbol) is complete.

By the way, the conventional reel-type game machine (No. 4 machine) has a relatively high gambling nature. 30th Law No. 55) was enforced and applied to the latest reel-type game machines called No. 5 machines.

For example, in the 5th or 6th reel type game machine, the ball output rate (short term, medium term, long term) is stipulated very precisely by the rules, and in the big bonus game (BB game), the game medals etc. is over a predetermined number (for example, 360 or 480), and in the regular bonus game, although it is not as good as the BB game, it ends when about 100 or so dozens of coins are obtained. It's becoming In other words, due to the revision of the rules, the upper limit of the number of payouts in one bonus game and the increase speed of medals per game are restricted.

In addition, as a result of the prohibition of the bonus stock function for continuously releasing bonuses (continuous chan), which can be said to be the biggest feature of the conventional reel-type game machine (machine No. 4), the conventional slot game machine The devices and performance that were given to the machine itself are lost, and naturally the gaming and gambling properties are extremely degraded, and players (slotters), who were good customers, are losing customers.

However, even in such a strict regulatory situation, some deregulation has been made, and as a result of new ingenuity along with it, the ART function (assist replay time function) called the third bonus or A slot machine equipped with an AT function (assist time function) has been developed. This ART function etc. is a pattern stop operation procedure (stop switch operation order, bonus It is a function that announces the operation timing to aim at the color of the pattern by liquid crystal display or voice, and assists the button operation.

And especially recently, instead of increasing the number of acquisitions with the big bonus or regular bonus by the main control described above, sub-control is used to control the desired timing (the timing of winning the AT lottery by rare small wins, the number of games played, and the number of games played is the ceiling number of games). ) activates ART (pseudo bonus, third bonus), and by notifying the pushing order, the pushing order small role is won with a high probability, creating a wave of paid balls. Further, by internally winning 2 types of big bonuses (2 types of BB) that do not increase or decrease medals even if you win, a high probability replay state is maintained, the game is always played in this state, and the game is played only with the ART function. A number of models that control balls have also become hits, and reel-type game machines with a variety of game features are appearing one after another.

Further, in the type bonus (RB), 3 types of small wins in which the number of payouts is larger than the number of inputs (for example, 9 payouts in a small bell win) are provided, and 3 types of small bell wins are provided at the time of lottery for the type bonus. By stacking the winning areas, this bonus has the property that the number of balls that come out decreases as a result.

This reduced bonus (RB) is not profitable for the player, and at first glance it seems meaningless, but the advantage is that the reduced number of balls produced by this bonus can be added to the assist bonus intensively. occurs. In other words, since it is possible to effectively create a wave of paid balls, there is an effect that the reduced gambling property can be restored.

JP 2011-160844 JP 2011-125532 JP 2011-15719 JP 2016-202586 JP 2018-117700

Pachislot game machine Fist of the North Star - Legend of the Savior at the end of the century - (Sammy) Pachislot Pachislot Machine Green Don VIVA! Passion South America Edition (Eleco)

By the way, as an original technology of ART (Patent No. 5433889) newly developed by the applicant, a predetermined pattern ( For example, there is a system in which a bell pattern) is made to win in a straight line on an effective line, and stop control is performed so that an incorrect answer does not win a small target winning combination. Then, when ART (assist function and high-probability game state) is won, the correct operation procedure is reported to the player to make a big difference in the number of medals obtained. As a result, a large number of medals can be obtained by eliminating the error of the hand in a high-probability game state and notifying an advantageous pushing order in the AT, so that a wave of paid balls can be created.

However, with the conventional decreasing bonus (RB), when the RB wins, the number of balls that come out always decreases, so the player does not gain anything during the RB, and as a result, the player loses motivation. There was a problem.

In addition, in the ART bonus, since the conventional outlier area is changed to a replay win, a replay that does not increase medals during the game is won with a high probability, and the player is frustrated that it wastes time accordingly. .

In the present invention, the communication signals between the medalless game machine and the dedicated unit are specified in the connection specifications stipulated in the industry, but the main control unit that controls the execution of the game, the dedicated unit and the information about the game point To provide a game machine or the like capable of determining whether communication between a dedicated unit and a game point control part is normal or not by efficiently communicating with a game point control part that controls the communication of the game point control part.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming system according to claim 1 provides a gaming system that enables a game to be played by a gaming machine that gives predetermined game points when a prize is won as a result of executing a game. a game system, the game system includes a game device connected to the game machine to convert the game points into points, and the game machine includes a main control unit that controls the execution of the game and a game point control unit for controlling communication of information on the game device and the game points, the main control unit being capable of bi-directional communication with the game point control unit, and There are a plurality of game state commands to be sent to the game point control unit according to the game state of the machine, and constant commands to be sent to the game point control unit at each predetermined interrupt cycle. When either the game state command or the constant command is received from the control unit, the information regarding the currently accumulated game points and the information as to whether or not the communication with the game device is normal are combined into one. It is characterized by including it in a command and transmitting it to the main control unit.

A gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention is a gaming machine that gives predetermined game points when a prize is won as a result of executing a game, wherein the gaming machine converts the game points into points. The game machine is connectable to a device, and comprises a main control unit that controls execution of the game, and a game point control unit that controls communication of information on the game device and the game points, The main control unit is capable of bi-directional communication with the game point control unit, and transmits a plurality of game state commands to the game point control unit according to the game state of the game machine, and at each predetermined interrupt cycle There is a constant command to be transmitted to the game point control unit, and when the game point control unit receives either the game state command or the constant command from the main control unit, the currently accumulated game points and information on whether or not the communication with the game device is normal are included in one command and transmitted to the main control unit.

According to the gaming system and the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a game state command or a constant command is received from the main control unit (main control unit 100), the game point control unit (credit control unit 165) includes information on the currently stored game points and information on whether communication with the game device (sandwich device 300) is normal or not in one command, and sends it to the main control unit (main control unit 100) Send. Therefore, the main control unit (main control unit 100) that controls the execution of the game, which is the problem described in the 0018th paragraph, efficiently communicates with the game point control unit (credit control unit 165), It is possible to provide a game machine or the like capable of determining whether communication between the dedicated unit built in the 300 and the game point control section (credit control section 165) is normal .

1 is a schematic front view of a reel-type gaming machine; FIG. It is a right side view of the reel-type gaming machine. 4 is a perspective view of a design panel; FIG. It is an internal structure schematic diagram of a reel-type game machine. It is a block diagram of a control circuit system of the reel-type game machine. 4 is a block diagram of a control circuit system that controls the drum section; FIG. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section; FIG. It is a pattern arrangement table of a drum. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section; FIG. 3 is a configuration block diagram of a drum section; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing the relationship of each signal; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a left drum; It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship with a left drum, a window part, and pattern position data. It is a combination display judgment figure of a design. 1 is a configuration block diagram of a display effect device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a conceptual diagram showing a storage state of an effect pattern data table; It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. It is a conceptual diagram of a general lottery table. It is a payout table showing the relationship between the combination of symbols and the number of won medals. It is a flow chart showing the main operation processing procedure of the reel-type gaming machine. It is a pattern arrangement table of a drum. It is a combination display judgment figure of a design. It is a payout table when the accessory is not activated (during normal game, the prescribed number is 3). It is a game state transition diagram and a conceptual diagram showing the lottery probability of various combinations. It is a conceptual diagram showing a simultaneous winning state of a role. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is a flow chart which shows a design stop processing subroutine. It is a schematic diagram of the production|presentation screen which a display production|presentation apparatus displays. It is a schematic diagram of the production|presentation screen which a display production|presentation apparatus displays. It is a schematic diagram of the production|presentation screen which a display production|presentation apparatus displays. It is a schematic diagram of the production|presentation screen which a display production|presentation apparatus displays. It is a schematic diagram of the production|presentation screen which a display production|presentation apparatus displays. It is a pattern arrangement table of a drum. It is a combination display judgment figure of a design. This is a payout table or the like when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game, the specified number is 3). It is a game state transition diagram and a conceptual diagram showing the lottery probability of various combinations. It is a conceptual diagram showing the lottery probability of various combinations. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area of a minor combination. It is a conceptual diagram of a winning area of a minor combination. It is a figure which shows an example of minor combination explicit identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information. It is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information. This is the pattern layout of the drum. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a replay combination; It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure until ART start. 10 is a flowchart showing a bell replay processing subroutine; 10 is a flow chart showing a processing subroutine for a special add-on zone D; It is a flow chart which shows a freeze effect processing subroutine. It is a flow chart which shows a freeze effect processing subroutine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a special addition screen. It is a schematic diagram of a special addition screen. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; It is a schematic diagram of a production screen. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a transmission processing procedure of winning combination information; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a transmission processing procedure of winning combination information; FIG. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram of a pushing order minor combination; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a transmission processing procedure of winning combination information; FIG. It is a front view of a sand device. It is a flow chart which shows a payment processing procedure. It is a block diagram of a control circuit system of the reel-type game machine. 3 is a schematic diagram of a display section and an operation section; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a display unit; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a display unit; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a display unit; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a display unit; FIG. This is the pattern layout of the drum. It is a payout table when the accessory is not activated and when the BB general game is played (the prescribed number is 3). It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is the schematic diagram which showed the pattern display state of the window part in time series. It is a block diagram of a control circuit system of the reel-type game machine. It is a main board command list. This is a medal count command list.

Definition:
In this specification, the fact that a combination of symbols related to a replay is displayed on a winning line is used as "winning of a replay combination" for the sake of convenience. However, the original "winning" means that a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed as a necessary combination for winning a game medal or the like.

A winning role is a role in which a prize-winning role and a hindering role are won at the same time, and the hindering role is composed of one type or a plurality of types. A prize-winning role is won when the stop buttons are operated in the winning-pressing order notified by the notification means. won't win either. In other words, the impeding role is a role for inhibiting the prize-winning role of the prize-winning role. For example, in the case of the push-order bell role, there are 3 types of small bell wins (15 payouts) for winning purposes, 1 small payouts (1 payout) of the first hindering small wins, and 2 small wins of the second small hindering win. Five winning combinations are internally won at the same time, and when stop buttons are operated in the winning order, a small bell combination is won by stopping the bell pattern on the effective line. On the other hand, if the first stop operation is not in the winning order, the symbol of the first hindering minor combination is stopped on the active line, so that either one of the first hindering minor combinations wins or does not win (lost). Become. When the first stop operation is in the winning pressing order and the second stop operation is not in the winning pressing order, the pattern of the second hindering minor combination is stopped on the effective line, so that the second hindering minor combination wins thereafter. It should be noted that the payout for the second hindering small combination may be set to one, or may be lost. Another push-order role is a push-order replay role.

Basic implementation:
A reel-type game machine is taken as an example of the game machine according to the present invention, and this embodiment describes in detail the basic configuration and basic operation of the reel-type game machine.

FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a reel-type game machine ((A) is a general view, (B) is a front top view), FIG. 2 is its right side view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a design panel.

1 is a reel-type game machine body generally called a "pachi-slot machine", which is roughly divided into a housing 1a containing a rotating drum (drum section 2) and a front door 1b (see FIG. 2 in particular). .

The front door 1b is the main part that can be said to be the face of the reel-type game machine. By adding gold plating, metalizing (plating), satin tone (plating), etc. to the resin material, the appearance is given a gorgeous and dignified feeling.

A transparent panel 21 is fitted in the front surface of the front door 1b. A design panel 22 is attached to the front door 1b inside the transparent panel 21.例文帳に追加

The design panel 22 has an upper surface portion 22a to which the display effect device 11 (or image display device) that performs various effects according to the game situation is screwed and fixed, and a middle surface portion in which the window portion 3 (design display window) is formed. 22b and a lower surface portion 22c to which a light-emitting display device (display LED block 4) is attached form a bottom surface portion 22d that is bent toward the inside of the housing 1a. As a result, a recessed space is formed in a substantially box-like shape (see FIG. 3 in particular).

On the bottom part 22d, a three-dimensional projecting decoration 23 or a three-dimensional electric driving object 24 driven in accordance with the progress of the game There are electric toys used for production, opening and closing doors, bumpers that move up and down, and ships that swing.However, productions that are unrelated to the internal winning role may simply be performed.) is provided.

The front door 1b and the design panel 22 are integrally molded from a resin material using a mold. Generally, injection molding, extrusion molding, foam molding, vacuum molding, etc. are used as the molding method. Various general-purpose resins such as are used.

A drum unit (reel drum) 2 is built in the housing 1a and is composed of three drums, a left drum 2a, a middle drum 2b and a right drum 2c. Inside each drum, there is provided a reel pattern display LED (not shown), which emits light (lights up or blinks) or goes out according to various effects. In other words, each drum is a symbol row displaying a plurality of symbols in a row from top to bottom, and in this case, a variable display game is started in which three symbol rows (a plurality of rows) are varied. It should be noted that the display of symbols using a liquid crystal display device or the like instead of each drum also corresponds to a variable display game in which a sequence of symbols in which a plurality of symbols are drawn is varied.

Reference numeral 3 denotes a window provided in the center of the front of the design panel 22, through which the design on the reel tape attached (arranged or applied) to the outer periphery of the drum section 2 can be seen through the transparent panel 21. It's like In the window portion 3, a total of five effective lines, that is, three effective lines extending in the horizontal direction and two effective lines intersecting in the It is conspicuously displayed by a line connecting the drums 2c. However, the effective lines are not limited to the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction, and the number of lines is not limited to this. In addition, below the effective line, a reel line display LED is embedded, and lights up or flashes when a prize is won or when the game is activated.

4 is a display LED block provided on the lower side of the window portion 3 and on the lower surface of the design panel 22. As will be described later, an input number LED 4a, an accumulated medal number display LED 4b, a medal payout number display LED 4c, and a replay display LED 4d. , an error display LED 4e and a display LED 4f during production.

5 is a medal insertion unit, which is a game medal (a game medium, and may be called a "coin" or simply a "medal") for starting a variable display game that rotates and stops the drum unit 2 (rotating drum). There is a medal slot for inserting A left light transmitting portion 5a and a right light transmitting portion 5b are provided on both sides of the medal inserting portion 5, and light from a plurality of light sources (e.g., LEDs) attached to the left and right of the lower side emits light from the medals. Red (first color) when it is not possible to insert medals, blue (second color) when medals can be inserted and displayed for addition for games, and green when medals are displayed in addition to the medal storage device. Light up with (third color). However, if medals cannot be inserted, the light may be turned off. In the game software, the game medium is data representing game medals or game coins (for example, the number of inserted medals, credit numerical data, or tokens), and the actual game medals or game coins are inserted from the medal insertion unit 5. not to be

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot are counted by a medal sorting device (also referred to as a "selector", not shown), and the number of medals inserted normally is added to display the number of inserted medals LED 4a of the display LED block 4. Alternatively, it is displayed on the stored medal number display LED 4b.

6 is a settlement button (or a credit return switch), which is used to activate and release a medal storage device (not shown) and to pay out (return) inserted medals and stored medals. In particular, as will be described later, the game value is settled or returned by outputting the total value (game value) of the inserted medals and the stored medals to a sandwich device connected to the gaming machine main body. For example, assuming that there are 3 inserted medals and 40 stored medals (a total of 43 credits), when the settlement button is operated in this state, the gaming machine body 1 transmits game value data, A total of 43 game values are returned. When the sand device receives game value data corresponding to a total of 43 cards from the gaming machine main body, it records the game value information on a built-in member card or card-shaped information recording medium and discharges it to the outside of the sand device. Naturally, if 100 accumulated medals are recorded in the membership card, 143 new accumulated medals are recorded.

A 1-bet button 7 is used when inserting one stored medal in the medal storage device for playing a game. Recently, there are cases where the 1-bet button 7 is not provided. Further, on the left side of the 1-bet button 7, there may be provided a cross key (not shown) necessary for operating the cursor in the up, down, left, and right directions and viewing the history information.

8 is a max bet button, which is used when inserting the maximum number of 3 medals stored in the medal storage device for playing a game, or when playing a bonus game, etc. The maximum number of inserted medals (1) Or 2 pieces: Use when inserting the optimum number). An LED is provided inside the max bet button 3 and lights up when the max bet button 3 is in an operable state.

Reference numeral 9 denotes a start lever (a part of the spinning drum rotation starting device), which is used to start the drum section 2 all at once after inserting a predetermined number of game medals necessary for playing a game. An LED is provided around the start lever 9 and lights up when the start operation is possible. In addition, the start lever 9 is set to a desired set value selected from step values 1 to 6 (or four-step jump numbers such as 1, 3, 5, and 7, etc.) when setting the ball output rate in stages. Used when confirming (retyping).

Reference numeral 10 denotes a stop button section (also referred to as a "stop switch" as a synonym), which is used to stop the rotating drum section 2; The stop button section 10 is composed of a group of three buttons, a left stop button 10a, a middle stop button 10b, and a right stop button 10c (there are rare cases where there are four buttons). By operating the button section 10, the left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c corresponding to each button can be stopped. When the rotation of the left drum 2a, middle drum 2b and right drum 2c reaches a predetermined speed (approximately 80 rpm) and the stop button portion becomes operable, the stop button 10a and the stop button LEDs built in 10b and stop button 10c are lit. When the left stop button 10a, middle stop button 10b, and right stop button 10c are used as direction input means, they can correspond to leftward, upward, and rightward inputs, respectively.

11 is a display rendering device consisting of a color display using a cathode ray tube, an LCD (liquid crystal display), a PDP (plasma display panel), or an FPD (flat panel display) such as an organic EL (electroluminescence). Under the control of an effect control unit (not shown), various image effects related to the reel game, notification of required information, and the like can be performed. It should be noted that regardless of whether special glasses are used or not, display effect devices capable of stereoscopic display have recently been manufactured at low cost, and 3D display devices in which effect images such as 7 symbols pop out in the ready-to-win state and the jackpot state. Amusement machines that use the technology are becoming mainstream. The effect control unit has a ROM and a RAM, performs two-way communication with the sub-control unit 160, and executes various effects according to the received effect command.

A speaker unit 12 is composed of four speakers, an upper left speaker 12a, an upper right speaker 12b, a lower left speaker 12c and a lower right speaker 12d. A warning sound is generated when 1b is open or when trouble occurs. If a serious trouble (selector error, hopper error or RAM error, excluding door opening) occurs, the error display LED 4e lights up together with a warning sound.

Numeral 13 denotes a game state display LED unit, which includes an upper state display LED 13a provided on the upper portion of the display effect device 11, upper left state display LED 13b and upper right state display LED 13c provided on both sides, middle left state display LED 13d and middle right state display LED 13d. It is composed of a state display LED 13e, a lower left state display LED 13f, a lower right state display LED 13g and a middle and lower state display LED 13h, and various light effects can be effectively performed. In addition, while the stepped set value is being changed, the front door 1b is open, or trouble occurs, the flashing is repeated as a warning display.

Since the gaming state display LED section 13 (13a to 13h) is arranged so as to go around the outer circumference of the front door 1b, the colorful light is continuously emitted to the player, and the outer circumference is circled. It becomes possible to effectively perform a rotating light effect. In particular, the upper state display LED 13a provided at the upper central position of the front door 1b (the upper central position of the front surface of the game machine main body) is called a top lamp, and is a unique special combination corresponding to the internal winning or winning rare small combination. It plays a central role in the light effect that emits light in different colors to notify the player of a winning combination or the like to arouse expectations.

FIG. 1(B) shows an embodiment of a reel-type gaming machine housing in which a logo panel section 17, which will be described later, is eliminated, and the top lamp 13a is enlarged as a whole. This top lamp 13a is a variable display game in which the drum section is varied, and an internal winning combination is determined in advance by lottery, and when the stop switch is operated and the three drum sections are stopped, it corresponds to an internal winning combination or a winning combination. After emitting light in its own color (red for cherries, purple for plums, yellow for bells, and blue for replays), during the interval until the next variable display game starts, it will be turned off or white that is different from its own color. It will be in a light emitting state with a neutral color such as.

A plurality of status display LEDs may be provided in the left and right spaces (above the upper surface portion 22a) of the display effect device 11 for notifying bonus winning announcements and necessary information. In addition, in the left and right spaces of the drum section 2 (above the middle surface 22b), AT stock notification lamps are provided to announce the winning of AT stock. When the AT stock number is 10 or more, the left and right AT stock notification lamps light up.

Reference numeral 14 denotes a special button which is used to display information requested according to the various games displayed on the display effect device 11 and their image effects (e.g., power level gauge increase, bonus establishment pattern display, fighter machine gun operation, etc.). Input information such as a bomb drop or a moving direction of a character) is input by a single operation or repeated hits by the player himself/herself. In particular, when the special button 14 is won in the AT stock lottery, it blinks with a sound effect of "Beep Beep Beep" to prompt the player to operate it. A sound is generated and the AT stock notification lamp lights up. The information input by the special button 14 is given to a sub-board (sub-block) to be described later, and is used only for various images and sound productions, so it does not affect the game result.

Reference numeral 15 denotes a receiving tray, which receives game medals paid out from a medal payout device 18 (see FIG. 4) through a medal payout port 16, and can receive up to several hundred of them.

Reference numeral 17 denotes a logo panel portion, which is used to display various trademarks, such as the name of the manufacturer or the name of the model, as required.

A door keyhole 19 is used to open the front door 1b of the reel-type game machine main body 1 with the door key, to cancel the stop state (a state in which the operation for the medal-type game is disabled), and to stop the game due to an error. Used when unlocking.

Reference numeral 20 denotes a return button (formally, it is called a ``inserted medal jam return button''), which returns the jammed game medals to a game medal selector (not shown) through which the game medals pass following the medal insertion unit 5. It is used when returning from the payout port 16. - 特許庁

Referring now to FIG. 3, the design panel 22 shown in FIG. 3A includes an upper surface portion 22a formed with a display effect device mounting portion 22j for mounting the display effect device 11, a window portion 3 (symbol display window 3). ) and a lower surface portion 22c to which the display LED block 4 described above is attached form a bottom surface portion 22d. things are set.

Further, the left side portion 22e and the right side portion 22f connecting the bottom portion 22d form a substantially box-like shape (or a substantially ship-like shape) with a recessed space formed therein, and the upper and lower portions thereof are provided for attachment to the front door 1b. An upper mounting portion 22g and a lower mounting portion 22h are provided in which a plurality of mounting holes are formed. By attaching decorative seals to the five inner surfaces of the bottom surface portion 22d, the left side surface portion 22e, and the right side surface portion 22f, the bottom surface portion 22d in particular forms three substantially flat surfaces. However, since the ornaments 23 and the electrically driven objects 24 are provided, it is natural that there are irregularities.

4a is an inserted number LED, which displays the number of game medals inserted from the medal inserting section 5 or by the max bet button 8 or 1 bet button 7 for playing a game.

4b is a stored medal number display LED, which displays the number of credits (stored number) of game medals, for example, within a range of a predetermined maximum number of 50 medals. In addition, a payout performance display at the time of settlement of stored medals is performed.

4c is an LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out, which displays the number of medals to be paid out when winning a prize. In addition, the set value of the ball payout rate and the error code when the game is stopped or when an error occurs are displayed.

4d is a replay display LED, which lights up when replay is activated in the variable display game.

An error display LED 4e lights up when a serious trouble (for example, a trouble other than door opening) occurs.

4f is a performance display LED, which lights up when displaying that the performance by the drum section 2 is being performed. In other words, it displays that the drum performance is being performed.

The design panel 22 shown in FIG. 3(B) is different from that shown in FIG. 3(A) in that an uppermost surface portion 22i is provided as a bent surface (edge). The provision of the uppermost surface portion 22i is advantageous in that the attached display effect device 11 can be easily seen by the player and the design panel itself becomes more robust.

FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a reel-type game machine.

At the center of the casing 1a of the reel-type game machine main body 1, a drum portion 2 and a medal payout device 18 (a medal hopper 18) are arranged therebelow.

A reflector 27 is provided in the upper right part of the housing 1a, and a photosensor is provided at a position corresponding to the front door 1b. When the front door 1b is closed, the LED light emitted from the photosensor is reflected. The reflected light is reflected by the plate and detected by the phototransistor, while the reflected light is not detected when the front door 1b is open. Therefore, the open/closed state of the front door 1b can be detected.

Reference numeral 28 denotes a power supply section, and when a power switch 28c is turned on, power is supplied to each circuit block, and after initial checks and initial settings, a variable display game can be performed.

Reference numeral 28a denotes a key switch for setting (also referred to as a setting change permission switch), which is used for stepwise setting operation of the payout rate and confirmation of the stepwise set value. By inserting the operation key into the keyhole 28d and rotating it, it is possible to switch from the OFF state to the ON state or from the ON state to the OFF state.

Reference numeral 28b denotes an error release switch, which is used to set the ball payout rate in stages or to release the stoppage of the game due to an error.

Reference numeral 4c denotes an LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out, which displays a set value for the rate of payout in stages. Return and display turnaround.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine.

The control circuit system is roughly divided into a main block (main board: the part not surrounded by the dashed line) and a sub-block (sub-board: the part surrounded by the dashed line). , sub-blocks control various effects that attract the player's interest, such as notification and display of game progress and internal lottery results. When ART is activated, the sub-block notifies a stop operation procedure (operation order and operation timing of the stop button section 10) for avoiding a small win or falling replay.

Reference numeral 100 denotes a main control unit, which is an integrated one-chip microcomputer (LE4380A-PA-S manufactured by EL Tech Co., Ltd.) equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU, and controls a predetermined data table area and the control procedure of the entire apparatus. and a RAM 102 (also known as RWM: rewritable memory) that temporarily stores information necessary for control in which counters, registers, etc. are formed. ) and are provided. As will be described later, the RAM 102 retains all stored control data by a RAM backup power supply constantly supplied via the power connector even when the power switch 28c is turned off or the power cord is unplugged. However, if the power connector itself is pulled out, power will not be supplied, so the control data will be erased (all cleared or reset to 0) or become meaningless information.

The main control unit 100 has a start switch sensor 110 (start switch sensor 110), a stop button sensor 120, a medal detection sensor 130, a bet button sensor 140, and a bet button sensor 140 via an I/O port (not shown) and a data bus. , a step setting unit 150, a stop setting unit 180, and a settlement button sensor are connected, and the main control unit 100 is configured to be able to receive input signals from these.

In addition, the main control unit 100 is connected to the drum unit 2, the medal payout device 18, the display LED block 4 and the external centralized terminal board 170 via an I/O port (not shown) and a data bus. The main control unit 100 is configured to be able to control each of these devices by sending and receiving input/output signals. An index signal of one pulse per one rotation is input to the main control section 100 from each index sensor provided in the drum section 2 .

The main control unit 100 outputs information necessary for tabulating and managing the operation status of the game machines in the pachislot parlor or the like from the external centralized terminal board 170, but does not receive any information from the external centralized terminal board 170. . Signals that the main control unit 100 outputs to the outside include a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, an external output signal 1 (eg, BB signal or pseudo BB signal), an external output signal 2 (eg, RB signal or pseudo RB signal), They are an external output signal 3 (for example, AT signal), an external output signal 4 (for example, a signal indicating that various errors have occurred), an external output signal 5 (for example, an act detection signal), and a relay common signal. In particular, the BB signal and RB signal are not only aggregated and managed by the hall computer as a bonus role, and the AT signal as a special assist bonus role (referred to as a "third bonus role"). The information is also output to a data counter installed near the top, and is used to display to the player the main information of the pachislot game (the number of games played, the number of BBs, the number of ARTs, and the number of balls released).

This main control unit 100 extracts one of the random numbers (values from 0 to 65535) continuously generated by the built-in random number generation unit 103 according to the operation of the start lever 9 by the player. A drum unit 2 (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b, and right drum 2c), which is a three-row (multiple-row) pattern row on which a lottery is executed and a plurality of (usually 20 or 21) patterns are drawn. The symbol variation display game is started by rotating the . For example, in this random number lottery, when any of the small wins with payouts such as bells, cherries, watermelons, and plums is internally won, and the player operates the stop button unit 10 to stop, the main control unit 100 follows the order of operation. The drum section 2 is stopped at predetermined positions in order. As a result, if the predetermined symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five activated lines of the window portion 3, the prize is won. However, the number of valid lines is not limited to five, and may be changed according to the number of inserted medals, or increased or decreased as appropriate according to design specifications and game conditions.

For example, assuming that the number of payouts of game media prescribed according to the type of winning is 1 bell, 2 cherries, 5 watermelons, and 8 plums, only bell patterns are displayed side by side on the second line. If so, the main control unit 100 pays out one ticket as a bell prize. Assuming that the prescribed number of coins to be inserted is 3, even if the bell wins, the balance will be minus 2. Therefore, in a state in which the bonus combination and the small combination are internally won at the same time, priority is given to the internal winning small combination symbols. Medals can be consumed even if it is stopped on the effective line. On the other hand, if the bell pattern is displayed on the second line and the plum pattern is displayed side by side on the third line, the main control unit 100 pays out 9 prizes in total of the winning 1 bell and 8 plums. It becomes a plus dividend of 6 cards.

A sub control unit 160 and a credit control unit 165 are connected to the main control unit 100 via an I/O port (not shown) and a data bus. Basically, the main control unit 100 can transmit various information to both control units, but conversely, the main control unit 100 cannot receive information from both control units (that is, one-way communication from the main control unit 100 to both control units). are connected). However, only 2-bit credit data can be received from the credit control unit 165 via the data input circuit 166 (for example, two NOT circuits). This credit data is 2-bit data of 00 indicating 0 credits, 01 indicating 1 credit, 10 indicating 2 credits, and 11 indicating 3 or more credits. It is input as a High or Low signal to two input ports.

The main control unit 100 transmits control data (for example, coin insertion data, lottery result and winning status data, step setting value data, switch operation state of the step setting unit 150) necessary for various controls of the sub-blocks to the sub control unit 160. indicating data, etc.) to the sub-controller 160. Like the main control unit 100, the sub control unit 160 is an integrated one-chip microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU. A RAM 162 and the like are provided for temporarily storing information necessary for control received from the main control unit 100 and having counters, timers, registers, and the like. This ROM 161 stores a plurality of BGM (background music) data, and especially during the bonus game, specially arranged BGM is played according to the production scene in order to raise the player's feelings. Selected and played as appropriate. Note that the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 160 do not have to be provided separately, and can be provided as one control unit.

The sub control unit 160 includes a display effect device 11, a speaker unit 12, a game state display LED unit 13, an input SW unit 25 (input switch unit 25), A timer unit 26, an operation direction sensor 111, a special button sensor 112, and a door abnormality signal output device 113 are connected, and the sub control unit 160 receives input signals from these devices and outputs necessary data and signals. It is possible to perform various controls using

The sub control unit 160 displays the difference number after initialization and the variable display game completed after the bonus based on the inserted number data, the payout number data, and the variable display game count data in the control data transmitted from the main control unit 100. The number of times is counted, and when the counted difference number or number of times reaches a predetermined number, an AT stock lottery or a selection game is activated. At this time, the sub-control unit 160 displays on the display effect device 11, "Do you want to start the selected game? If you want to start, hit the special button repeatedly."

In this AT stock lottery, the number of stocks is drawn, for example, in the range of 0 to 127. 0 is lost, while 1 to 127 are winners. If 127 wins, at least 127 consecutive wins will be decided, but since the AT stock lottery is executed even when AT is stocked, it is possible to accumulate up to MAX 10000 by adding more. However, these are merely examples based on design specifications, and are not limited to these numerical values.

In addition, the sub-control unit 160 confirms whether or not the selection game is to be executed, and when the player hits the special button repeatedly, receives a pulse signal corresponding to the number of times the special button has been hit repeatedly, and the number of pulses is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of eight. When reaching , a selection game lottery is performed to determine a winning number (for example, "0" or "1"). Then, when the selection game is activated, the display effect device 11 displays "○ or ×", "left or right", etc. corresponding to the left stop button 10a and the right stop button 10c, respectively, so that the player can make a selection operation. encourage For example, when "0" is won in the selection game lottery result, if the player operates the left stop button 10a to select the corresponding "o" or "left", the selection game is won. Then, when the sub-control unit 160 determines that it has won, in the subsequent variable display game, until the number of game media inserted, the number of differences, or the number of game media corresponding to the number of variable display games increases, or the AT stock lottery (1 to 127 The AT function (the function of notifying the auxiliary information by the notifying means) is activated for the number of times the lottery wins.

On the other hand, if the player operates the right stop button 10c to select the corresponding "x" or "right", the selection game is lost. Then, when the sub-control unit 160 determines that the selection has been lost, the sub-control unit 160 initializes the difference number or the number of variable display games without activating the AT function, and returns to the start. As a result, even if the player is hooked, if he wins the selection game, he will be able to recover more than he has lost so far, or he will be able to make a big win, and he can expect a one-shot reversal. In the above description, it is possible to return 5 times when the player wins the prize. Increase.

The sub control unit 160 executes a random number lottery inside the main control unit 100 in accordance with the start operation of the start lever 9, and upon receiving notification of the result of a big win, a replay, a small win or a loss, the sub control unit 160 informs the player of the result of the lottery. Before the notification is given, an effect lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform an effect on the display effect device 11, the speaker unit 12, and the game state display LED unit 13.例文帳に追加The sub-control part 160 selects a performance image to be displayed from among a plurality of performance images stored in the ROM 161 and outputs the selected performance image to the display performance device 11 when the performance lottery is won.

In particular, the sub-control unit 160, as will be described later, when there is an AT stock and a small winning combination in pushing order (a first small winning combination and a plurality of small winning combinations defined in a plurality of small winning orders in pushing order) is internally elected, Assist information (auxiliary information) for aligning the winning first minor combination pattern (for example, bell pattern) on the effective line is displayed on the display performance device 11.例文帳に追加This allows the player to easily win the first minor winning combination.

Here, returning to FIG. 5, the credit control unit 165 is connected to the sand device 300, and when set to the sand mode to be described later, it is point information corresponding to the cash inserted by the player or a recording medium. To receive credit information such as a membership card, a visitor card, a cash card or a prepaid card and display frequency information or credit information. When the player operates the lending button 167, 50 corresponding to 1000 yen is added and displayed on the stored credit display section. For example, if the stored credit display unit is displaying 1, 50 is added to 1 and 51 is displayed, but only up to 99 is displayed. Also, the credit control unit 165 changes the state in which data 01 is input to the data input circuit 166 to the state in which data 11 indicating the number of credits of 3 or more is input. When the max bet button 8 is operated in this state, the main control unit 100 lights up three insertion number LEDs 4a, and outputs to the credit control unit 165 insertion data indicating that three credits have been inserted as the number of bets. . The credit control unit 165 causes the stored credit display unit to display 48, which is the value obtained by subtracting the credit 3. In this state, when the player operates the settlement button 190 (credit return switch), the main control unit 100 transmits the bet amount data indicating the bet amount of 3. When the credit control unit 165 receives the number-of-bets data, the credit control unit 165 transmits return credit information (game value) that the return credit is 51 (48+3) to the sand device 300 . The sand device 300 adds 51 of the return credit to the membership card or the like, records the cash balance, and discharges it. When the player operates the checkout button in a state where the replay combination (replay combination) has won and the next game can be executed, the main control unit 100 transmits bet amount data indicating a bet amount of 0. , the credit control unit 165 transmits the return credit information (game value) that the return credit is 48 to the sand device 300 . The sand device 300 adds 48 of the return credit to the membership card or the like, records the cash balance, and ejects it to the outside. The sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display a warning screen and generates a warning sound from the speaker unit 12 to inform the player that the game can be played again.

The operation direction sensor 111 outputs direction signals corresponding to the up, down, left, and right directions in which the start lever 9 is operated, and the sub-control unit 160 receives the direction signals and displays various image effects and winning announcements according to the direction signals. etc. are displayed on the display effect device 11, and the speaker section 12 generates sound effects.

The special button sensor 112 outputs an ON signal (e.g., HIGH signal) when the special button 14 is operated, and outputs an OFF signal (e.g., LOW signal) when the special button 14 is released, and the sub-controller 160 receives this ON signal. Depending on the timing and the number of times pulses are received (called repeated hits), various games and their video effects, winning announcements, etc. are displayed on the display effect device 11.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the speaker unit 12 generates sound effects such as bomb dropping and machine gun operation.

The door abnormality signal output device 113 is a device that detects the open/closed state of the door and outputs a control signal to the sub-controller 160. When the main power supply is ON, an ON/OFF signal is generated according to the opening/closing of the front door 1b. on the other hand, when the main power is off, it is driven by the power supplied from the sub power supply (backup battery), detects and stores abnormal opening and closing of the front door 1b when the main power is off, and then the main power is turned off Even if it is turned ON, it notifies the sub-controller 160 of abnormal opening/closing at the time of main power failure. As a result, the sub-control section 160 generates a warning sound when the main power is turned on, even if the front door 1b is closed and there seems to be no abnormality, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize the abnormal situation. , Appropriate measures such as checking and inspection of the game machine can be taken.

The medal detection sensor 130 is composed of a medal passage sensor and a proximity sensor (not shown), and outputs a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of medals inserted from the medal slot 5 . The main control unit 100 receives this pulse signal and executes counter logic processing at the rise and fall of the pulse signal, and displays the number of inserted medals LED 4a in the display LED block 4 or the number of accumulated medals LED 4b according to the number of pulses. control to display the inserted number or the number of credits increased by the number.

The bet button detection sensor 140 includes a 1-bet button detection sensor 140a that outputs a pulse signal in response to the operation of the 1-bet button 7, and a max-bet button detection sensor 140b that outputs a pulse signal in response to the operation of the max-bet button 8. It consists of two and is separately connected to two ports of the main control unit 100 (details not shown). The main control unit 100 controls the number display of the inserted number LED 4a so as to correspond to the obtained pulse signal.

When the player operates the start lever 9 after inserting a predetermined number of medals, the start SW sensor 110 outputs a start signal, and the main control unit 100 receives the start signal as a trigger to perform a random number lottery or the like. A driving pulse signal is output to the drum unit 2 as soon as the variable display game is started. The game performed by operating the start lever 9 once is a variable display game, and the player aims to increase the number of medals by winning a bonus game (big bonus or regular bonus). repeat the game. Note that the bonus game means, for example, a first class special role (RB), a first class special role continuous operation, or a second class special role continuous operation.

Then, when the stop buttons 10a, 10b and 10c are operated during the variable display game, the main control unit 100 stops the rotation of the rotating drums, and a predetermined winning combination is established (the pattern of each rotating drum is predetermined). When medals are paid out, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the number of medals to be paid out display LED 4c in the display LED block 4, and is added to the number of credits to obtain medals. Displayed on the stored number display LED 4b. When a payout operation is performed by the checkout button 6 or when the number of credits exceeds, for example, the maximum number of 50, the main control unit 100 drives and controls the medal payout device 18 to pay out the required number of medals. It is discharged from a payout port 16 and stored in a tray 15. - 特許庁

Further, the main control section 100 outputs control data (event data) relating to internal winning to the sub-control section 160 when a replay or a small winning combination, particularly a bonus, is internally won. When the sub control unit 160 receives control data from the main control unit 100, the sub control unit 160 controls the lighting of the gaming state display LED unit 13 and controls the voice synthesis LSI (not shown) for generating sound effects from the speaker unit 12. , and control the display of characters and background images on the display screen of the display effect device 11, and perform various effect operations.

150 is a step setting unit, and by performing a step setting operation of the ball payout rate, which will be described later, the hall side can set the step value according to the medal collection situation for the purpose of profit improvement and the release of a large amount of medals at events and new openings. A desired set value can be selected from 1 to 6 (or jump numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.).

If the stop setting unit (not shown) is ON (or "1"), after the bonus game is over, the total number of medals displayed in the inserted number LED 4a and the accumulated medal number display LED 4b is forcibly paid out, An operation for playing the variable display game is disabled (stopped state), and a warning sound is generated from the speaker section 12.例文帳に追加Recently, there are many slot machines that do not have this stop setting section, so it is provided as needed.

Reference numeral 25 denotes an input SW unit (input switch unit) for inputting various data, for example, setting a warning mode when a staged setting operation of the ball payout rate is performed, and a time period during which a warning is generated or not generated. settings. As this warning mode, there are three modes: an ON state or an OFF state of the warning generation function, and a timer state in which a warning is generated only during a set period of time. The input SW section 25 is composed of an initialization switch for initializing the sub-blocks and a volume switch used for switching the volume of the speaker section 12, and is activated when both are pressed at the same time. ing.

Reference numeral 26 denotes a timekeeping unit composed of a radio clock that receives absolute time data from a satellite or the like and keeps accurate time.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a control circuit system for controlling the drum section.

The drum unit 2 includes step motors 30a, 30b, and 30c for controlling the rotation of three drums, a left drum 2a, a middle drum 2b, and a right drum 2c, and responds to drive pulse signals from the main control unit 100. When the stepping motors 30a, 30b and 30c are driven by the stepping motors 30a, 30b, and 30c, and drive pulse signals are continuously supplied to the three phases at the same time, an attractive force is generated and the stepping motors 30c are suddenly stopped.

The step motors 30a, 30b and 30c are of a 4-phase 1-2 excitation system with a step number of 252 steps/revolution (1.43 degrees/step), and when the main control unit 100 inputs 504 pulses of the drive pulse signal, the step motors 30a, 30b and 30c 1 rotation. Since one pulse of each index signal (reference signal or reference position signal) is returned from each drum sensor 31a, 31b, and 31c, which is a photointerrupter provided for each drum, the main control unit 100 controls each drum. position can be accurately determined. That is, the resolution by one input pulse is 0.714 (degrees/pulse). When the resolution is further increased, the rotational position can be grasped in detail by controlling the time from one input pulse to the next input pulse and the rotational speed.

FIG. 7 is a configuration block diagram of the drum section.

The rotating shafts of the step motors 30a (not shown), 30b (not shown) and 30c are respectively connected to the center portions of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, which are thick disk-shaped rotating bodies. and rotates in the direction of the arrow shown (ie, from top to bottom). In addition, a left drum belt 32a, a middle drum belt 32b, and a right drum belt 32c with a plurality of types of patterns are attached to the outer circumference of each drum. If the predetermined symbols drawn) are displayed in the window portion 3 in line on the activated line, it is established (winning or operation). The star mark, + mark, plum mark (black circle mark) and triangular mark in the figure are shown for convenience and are different from the actual ones. Designs are commonly used. Also, the bollard band is generally called a reel tape.

Drum sensors 31a, 31b and 31c (not shown) are provided for the step motors 30a, 30b and 30c, respectively, and one pulse of the index signal is returned from each drum sensor for each rotation of the step motor. is coming. The main control unit 100 always grasps the symbol number and the rotation angle (24 divisions/symbol) at the reference position (for example, the lowest position of the window part 3) from this index signal and the number of output drive pulse signals. ing.

FIG. 8 is a drum pattern layout table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, a belt (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern and a right drum pattern are drawn goes around the outer circumference of each drum. affixed to.

As shown in the example, 21 different patterns are drawn on each drum belt, and the big bonus patterns "Red 7" and "Blue 7" that activate the bonus, and cherry prizes for various small prizes. , a watermelon, a bell, and a replay that activates the replay. It should be noted that the discarded symbols do not constitute any combination even if they stop on the activated line, and are printed with "N" in a light gray circle, for example, so as not to be conspicuous to the player.

FIG. 9 is a structural block diagram of the drum section, and FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B) chronologically show states in which the right drum 2c is retracted.

The main control unit 100 receives the start signal of the variable display game, and when the result of the lottery is a win and the winning combination is internally won, the main control unit 100 performs a drawing control to draw the symbols of the winning combination onto the effective line as much as possible. conduct.

For example, a big bonus combination is internally elected, and in a so-called reach state in which symbols "7, 7" are aligned on the effective line diagonally below the right side of the stopped left drum 2a and middle drum 2b, four frames above this effective line. When the symbol "7" is positioned within 5 frames including the symbol on the active line, when the right stop button 10c is operated to stop (see FIG. 9A), the main The control unit 100 forcibly draws the symbol "7" onto the active line and performs a pull-in control to align the combination of "7, 7, 7" (see FIG. 9B).

On the other hand, even if one of the winning combinations is internally won by lottery, the player will not be in an advantageous state unless a predetermined symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the activated line. For example, the big bonus game (BB game) does not work unless it is displayed as shown in FIG. 9(B). This pull-in control is performed not only for the right drum 2c, but also for any of the patterns on the left drum 2a and the middle drum 2b. The main control unit 100 performs stop control by referring to a stop table that defines the stop position of each drum according to the random number lottery situation (internal winning or losing).

In the example of FIG. 9, in the reach state, the pattern "7" on the right drum 2c is exactly four frames above, and is lined up on the effective line as a target of the pull-in control. However, this pull-in control is not limited to four frames, and the number of pull-in frames can be increased or decreased by software control so as to conform to design specifications or legal regulations. Incidentally, when the random number lottery result in the general game is won, the sub-control unit 160 provides auxiliary information (operation order, Assist information such as operation timing (AT) is notified.

FIG. 10 is a configuration block diagram of the drum section, and FIGS. 10A and 10B show the state in which the right drum 2c is under avoidance control (or kicking control) in time series.

The main control unit 100 receives the start signal of the variable display game, and when the lottery result is a loss and the role is not established (when all the roles are not internally won), a prize is won or activated on the active line. Avoidance control is performed so that patterns of roles (bonus, small role, replay) are not aligned.

For example, in a ready-to-win state (tenpai state) in which a big bonus combination has not been internally won and symbols "7, 7" are aligned on the effective line diagonally below the right side of the stopped left drum 2a and middle drum 2b, the game is played. When the player operates the stop button 10c in a state in which the symbol "7" is positioned within one frame from the effective line by "eye-pressing" (for example, it is called "bita-pressing". FIG. 10 ( A)), the main control unit 100 moves the symbol "7" one step forward so that "7, 7, 7" are not aligned on the effective line, and performs avoidance control to forcibly lose ( See FIG. 10(B)). This avoidance control is performed not only for the right drum 2c, but also for any of the symbols on the left drum 2a and the middle drum 2b. It's like These pull-in control and avoidance control (kicking control) are performed by the main control unit 100 referring to a stop table according to the internal winning status or by control control by a program.

FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the index signal, pattern position data (frame data), drive pulse signal and stop button sensor signal.

FIG. 11(A) shows the index signals output from the drum sensors 31a, 31b and 31c, and the main control is performed so that T1 is constant at 0.751 seconds (that is, 79.9 revolutions/minute). controlled by the unit 100;

FIG. 11(B) shows pattern position data on the rotating drum, and FIG. 11(C) shows drive pulse signals.

The pattern position data is generated by dividing the drive pulse signal, and the data is subtracted by 1 every 24 pulses of the drive pulse signal. That is, with the index signal as a reference, the pattern position data is "21" when the drive pulse signal is in the range of 1 to 24 pulses, and the pattern position data is "20" when the drive pulse signal is in the range of 25 to 48 pulses. When the driving pulse signal is in the range of 49 to 72 pulses, the symbol position data is "19", .... When the driving pulse signal is in the range of 481 to 504 pulses, the symbol position data is "1" and the symbol position data is 21 to 1. to turn around. That is, the symbol position data returns to "21" after "1".

The drive pulse signal is a drive pulse of a prescribed pattern that is input to the motor coil to rotate the rotary drum in a fixed direction. When the pattern numbers 0 to 7 are repeatedly applied to the motor coils 1 to 4 phases three times as the drive pulse signal (that is, when 24 pulses are input), the rotary drum rotates from top to bottom by one pattern (one frame). do.

In particular, the input pulse phase data of the drive pulse to be input to the step motor is 5-bit data from 0 to 23 for driving the rotating drum one frame, and the pattern numbers 0 to 7 are the lower 3-bit phase data. Then, the drive pulse corresponding to the pattern number is actually applied to the motor coil phases 1 to 4. Therefore, even if only the pattern number is stored in the work RAM (RAM 102), it corresponds to the phase data storage means for storing the input pulse phase data.

FIG. 11(D) shows stop button sensor signals output when each stop button is operated. In this figure, the main controller 100 recognizes the pattern position data "11" and the input pulse phase data "10" (or the pattern number "2") at the rising edge of the stop button sensor signal.

FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the left drum 2a included in the drum section.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the left drum 2a is rotating in the direction of the arrow (from top to bottom), and a cherry pattern is displayed on one of the upper, middle, or lower tiers of the three windows 3 indicated by solid lines. When is stopped, a prize is awarded, and a predetermined number of game medals are paid out. Note that FIG. 12A shows a state in which the cherry pattern is stopped in the upper part of the window portion 3 .

When the player performs an operation to start the variable display game, the main control unit 100 performs an internal lottery. ), control to pull in cherry symbols (see FIG. 9) or avoidance control (see FIG. 10) is performed.

FIG. 12(B) shows the possible range of pull-in control. When the stop button 10a is operated at a position four frames above the position where the cherry pattern is exactly on the upper row, the main control unit 100 Stop the cherry symbol on the upper row of 3 (assuming that the vita symbol is on the upper row position). In practice, about 36 ms is required until the stop, so it is positioned higher by that amount, but for convenience of explanation, it is described in this manner. Also, since it is stipulated to stop within 190 ms from the stop operation, there are cases where four frames do not slip.

On the other hand, FIGS. 12(C) and 12(D) show the range in which avoidance control and the like are performed. If the stop button 10a is operated at a position above the frame (i.e., a position above 4 in FIG. 12A) or at a position slightly past the upper position, the stop button 10a will be one position above or below the upper position. Stop the cherry pattern one step down and make it a loss. In other words, since the middle cherry (cherry 2) or the lower cherry (cherry 3) has not been won, the cherry symbol must be forced to stop outside the window portion 3.例文帳に追加

FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the left drum 2a, the window portion 3, and the pattern position data.

As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the cherry symbols on the left drum 2a are frame number 8 and frame number 19 (see FIG. 8). Assuming that the bottom position of the section 3 is the measurement reference, the main control section 100 outputs symbol position data "15" and input pulse phase data "0" to symbol position data "11" and input pulse phase data "23", or symbol When the stop button 10a is operated in the range of the position data "5" and the input pulse phase data "0" to the symbol position data "1" and the input pulse phase data "23", the cherry pattern is stopped at the upper stage and a prize is awarded. . In other words, even if the stop button 10a is properly operated, not only will the player win with a probability of 10/21, but if the winning announcement is made, a skilled player can make the player win with a probability close to 100% by pressing the eyes. .

FIG. 14 is a combination display determination diagram of symbols.

When all three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 performs combination display determination of winning and operation-related symbols on the effective line corresponding to the number of inserted game medals. For example, when three game medals are inserted and two cherry symbols are displayed on the left drum 2a in the window portion 3, four medals are displayed in the upper row (2 medals x 2 lines: the second line and the second line). 4 lines), 2 game medals (2×1 line: 1st line) in the middle stage, and 4 game medals (2×2 lines: 3rd line and 5th line) in the lower stage. However, this effective line is a general one that has been adopted from the past, and recently there are many irregular lines as will be described later.

In addition, when the 8-piece payout bell pattern is displayed on the effective line of the window part 3, if it is only the middle row, it will be 8 (8 pieces x 1 line: 1st line) and if it is the upper row and the lower right diagonal For example, 15 game medals (8 medals×2 lines, but MAX 15 medals: 2nd line and 4th line) are paid out. In other words, the number of game media to be paid out, which is determined according to the type of winning prize, is totaled and paid out, but the maximum number of payouts at one time is 15.

FIG. 15 is a configuration block diagram of a display rendering device.

The display effect device 11 includes a command receiving unit 11a that receives effect commands from the sub-control unit 160, a display effect control unit 11b (including ROM 11c and RAM 11d), and a display panel 11e such as LCD, organic EL, and LED. there is In this case, the ROM 11c is separately provided in the display effect control section 11b, but there is no problem even if all the video data is stored in the ROM 161. FIG. Therefore, the ROM 11c may be considered as part of the ROM 161. FIG.

FIG. 16 is an effect pattern table, which associates the effect command with the effect pattern data stored in the ROM.

The effect command consists of 1-byte mode data and 1-byte event data, and is stored in association with effect pattern data (mainly moving images, but also still images), which are the contents of the effect. .

When the sub control unit 160 receives control data necessary for various controls from the main control unit 100 (in particular, various data indicating a big hit, a small win, a replay or a loss in the random number lottery result), the sub control unit 160 receives the random number Before notifying the lottery result, an appropriate performance command corresponding to the control data is transmitted to the display performance device 11 side, and the command receiving part 11a receives this performance command and transmits it to the display performance control part 11b.

Upon receiving the effect command, the display effect control section 11b reads effect pattern data corresponding to the effect command from the ROM 11c, develops the data in the RAM 11d, and transmits the data to the display panel 11e, thereby displaying the effect image corresponding to the effect command. configured to be displayed on the screen.

17 to 19 are schematic diagrams of effect screens displayed by the display effect device.

When the sub-control unit 160 transmits ($Z0$00) as an effect command, for example, the display panel 11e displays the "daytime effect pattern" of the low-probability stage that mainly indicates a state in which there is no AT stock or a state in which it is difficult to win an AT. 0” is displayed (see FIG. 17A). On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 160 transmits ($Y0$00) as an effect command, the display panel 11e displays a high-probability stage "night Effect pattern 0" is displayed (see FIG. 17(B)). Therefore, the player longs for the display of the "night performance stage" that mainly suggests a high-probability state during the game. However, it is also possible to display the "night production stage" even when there is no AT stock or in a non-high probability state, and vice versa to display the "day production stage" when there is an AT stock or in a high probability state. There is, and it is devised so that the interest of the player may be invited.

Further, when the sub-control unit 160 transmits ($S0$00) as an effect command, the display panel 11e superimposes the image "Dracula's Castle" corresponding to the "castle effect pattern 0" on the blue sky background screen. (See FIG. 17(A)) or superimposed on the background screen of the moonlit night (See FIG. 17(B)). Then, an announcement image corresponding to the established combination (small combination or replay) is displayed (see FIG. 17(C)).

When the production shown in FIG. 17(B) occurs frequently and then develops in multiple stages, it becomes a premonition production (extra hot production) in which there is a high expectation of AT stock or AT release. For example, FIG. 18A shows a state in which "Dracula's Castle" is enlarged and the iron gate is open. The door further expands (see FIG. 18(B)), opens gradually (see FIG. 18(C)), and displays the gorgeous interior of "Dracula's Castle" (see FIG. 18(D)). After that, it develops into a battle between the main character and the vampire Count Dracula, and if the main character wins, there is an AT stock and AT release is confirmed, and bonus release is confirmed during bonus internal election.

19(A) (same as FIG. 17(B)) in which the normal night screen is displayed, the display screen is scrolled to the right, the graveyard is enlarged, and the character's butler shouts "Ollah!" Along with the sound effect "Tirororororone", the main character appears from the dug grave in the center of the screen (see FIG. 19B), and the characters "BONUS" meaning "big win" are displayed ( (See FIG. 19(C)), an extremely hot premium effect may be produced. All of these display effects are also executed by the sub-controller 160 outputting effect commands according to the program.

FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram of a general lottery table.

The lottery table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and defines the relationship between winning combinations and numbers used for random number lottery.

In the case of the reel-type gaming machine of the present invention, the main control unit 100 generates random numbers. As for this random number, all values from 0 to 65535 (m7) are generated randomly only once in one cycle. FIG. 20A shows a lottery table used in the normal state (non-RT state). If the range is m1, a big bonus (BB) is won. That is, the internal lottery is to pick up (extract) only one random number value at a predetermined timing at the start operation, compare it with the lottery table, and determine the winning combination.

Similarly, if the random value is m1+1 to m2, the regular bonus (RB), if the random value is m2+1 to m3, the cherry, if the random value is m3+1 to m4, the watermelon, and if the random value is m4+1 to m5, the bell And while the replay is won when the random number is in the range of m5+1 to m6, it is lost when the random number is in the range of m6+1 to m7.

Normally, these numbers m1 to m7 are set appropriately in consideration of laws and regulations (Amusement Business Law) and game characteristics. RB winning probability is about 1/400, cherry and watermelon winning probability is about 1/50, bell winning probability is about 1/6, and replay winning probability is 1/7.3. It's becoming

On the other hand, FIG. 20(B) is a lottery table used in the high-probability replay state (RT state). In the replay time, the replay winning range is expanded by α, while the losing range is narrowed by α. Thus, the probability of winning the replay is set to about "1/2". As a result, the probability of winning the replay corresponding to the payout of 3 coins is greatly increased, while the probability of losing is decreased, so that the expected payout value of the game medals is greatly improved or increased during the replay time. . Further, the main control unit 100 can set the expected value of the replay time to a desired value by increasing or decreasing the α value.

Although detailed drawings of the lottery tables are omitted, there are six lottery tables 1, 2, . selects a lottery table according to the step set value and the number of inserted medals set by the step setting unit 150, and executes a bonus game or an internal lottery for a plurality of small wins in the variable display game. The expected value for winning the bonus game in the internal lottery is generally lottery table 1<lottery table 2< . However, in the case of a machine dedicated to three medals, a lottery table with one inserted medal is unnecessary.

FIG. 21 is a payout table showing the relationship between the combination of symbols and the number of won medals.

BB (Big Bonus) is a role name when the BB pattern of "Red 7" is aligned on the activated line. The game (BB game: operation of the character continuous actuating device) is entered, and ends when more than 360 sheets are paid out.

RB (regular bonus) is a role name when the RB pattern of "blue 7" is aligned on the effective line, and when this is aligned, the number of medals acquired is 0, and flag 1 is set in the corresponding flag area for regular bonus. The game (RB game: operation of the character continuous actuating device) is entered, and ends when more than 120 coins are paid out. Incidentally, these accessory continuous operating devices may be either the first type special accessory or the second type special accessory, and are appropriately selected according to the design specifications.

When the cherry pattern stops on the effective line of the left drum, one medal is obtained for each effective line. For example, if the effective line is the display judgment diagram of FIG. 14, if it stops at the middle stage of the left drum, it will be 1 (short che), but if it is the upper or lower stage, the effective line will be 2, and the payout will be 2 in total. It becomes a sheet (square che).

When the watermelon patterns are aligned on the effective line, five medals are obtained.

When the bell patterns line up on the activated line, eight medals are obtained.

When the replay symbols are aligned on the effective line, a replay in which medals are not obtained is activated, a flag 1 is set in the flag area, and a replay operation is performed by the player's operation of the start lever 9 to lower the flag (that is, 0). That is, the next game can be played without inserting medals.

Next, the basic operation of the reel-type game machine constructed as described above will be described in detail with reference to flowcharts and the like.

First, when the reel-type game machine is shipped from the factory, the default warning mode is "on", the stop setting unit 180 (stop setting switch) is "off", and the lowest step setting value is "1". Assume that is set.

On the game hall side, when the front door of the reel-type game machine main body 1 is opened and the power switch 28c is turned on before the player is allowed to play, power is supplied to each circuit block, and the main control unit 100 operates as described later. In step S100, an initial check (hardware abnormality check, etc.) and initial setting (for example, the stop setting flag "1", the step setting value "1" stored in the ROM 101, and the initial value of the control data are written to the RAM 102). Then, the sub-control unit 160 sets the warning mode to "on state", and when the front door 1b is closed, the variable display game can be played.

In this playable state, even if the game hall side opens the front door 1b again and operates the input SW section 25 (an operation of pressing the initialization switch and the volume switch at the same time), the sub control section 160 Since the control data indicating the stepped setting mode of the payout rate has not been received, the warning mode is not changed from the "on state" to another state ("off state" or "timer state"). Therefore, there is a peculiar effect that a goto master cannot easily change the warning mode. The stop setting flag "1" corresponds to "on" of the stop setting unit 180, and "0" corresponds to "off".

Then, it is assumed that the game hall side is going to change the setting of the ball payout rate for the grand opening, new opening, or event in this setting state.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the main operation processing procedure of the reel-type gaming machine.

An employee of the game hall opens the front door of the reel-type game machine main body 1 to turn off the power switch 28c once, inserts the setting change key into the setting key switch 28a and turns it to the right to turn it on (Fig. 4). ), and the power switch 28c is turned on again, power is supplied to each circuit block, and after initial checks and initial settings are executed in step S100, the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S100. At S110, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 28a is in the ON state.

If the setting key switch 28a is not in the ON state, the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S130.

In the setting change mode of step S120, before the game hall side makes the player play, the set value "6" of the ball output rate is inputted, the start lever 9 is hit once to confirm the set value, and the setting key switch 28a is pressed. When the switch is turned off, the main control unit 100 returns to step S100, sets the set value to "6", and performs necessary processing such as the initial check and initial setting of the hardware again.

Further, when the main control unit 100 outputs control data to the sub-control unit 160 in order to set the display of the initial screen in step S100, the sub-control unit 160 displays ($Y0$01) as an effect command, for example. It is transmitted to the production device 11 . As a result, the display panel 11e displays "night effect pattern 1" as a start screen (not shown), which is composed of a screen of a full moon in the night sky, Dracula's castle, and a cemetery.

When the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S130 after changing the step setting value, it checks for an abnormality such as a door open, hopper error, or selector error. While returning to step S100, if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S150. In particular, the main control unit 100, as an abnormality check, sets the data of the staged set values stored in the work RAM area to 0 to 5 (the staged set values displayed on the medal payout number display LED 4c correspond to 1 to 6, respectively). ), and if the step setting value is not within the predetermined range, a warning ("EE" error character display , light emission and warning sound) are generated to perform error processing (abnormality processing in step S140).

When the process proceeds to step S150, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the player has inserted a required number of game medals for the game using the medal detection sensor 130 or the bet button sensor 140, and if a predetermined number of game medals have been inserted , the process proceeds to step S160, and if the medal has not been inserted, the process returns to step S130 and waits while looping each step until the medal is inserted.

When the process proceeds to step S160, the main control unit 100 confirms whether or not the player has operated the start lever to start the variable display game. If not, the process returns to step S130 and waits while looping each step until the start operation is performed.

The main control unit 100 executes the main processing of the variable display game in step S170, performs a random number lottery in accordance with the reception timing of the start signal, picks up (extracts) the random value and the current internal state (RT or non-RT). It is determined whether or not an internal lottery is won by comparing with the lottery table (see the description of FIG. 20).

The main control unit 100 transmits a lottery result command and a game start signal to the sub control unit 160, simultaneously rotates the drum unit 2, and rotates the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c. A variable display game is started in which the symbols of are varied at a predetermined speed.

9 and 10, the main control unit 100 operates the left stop button 10a, the middle stop button 10b, or the right stop button 10c of the stop button unit 10 so that each pattern row (pinning band) is displayed. is stopped, pull-in control for aligning the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination on the effective line, or conversely, avoidance control for not aligning the symbols is performed. Further, when the sub-control unit 160 receives a lottery result command and a game start signal from the main control unit 100, the sub-control unit 160 performs a lottery operation to determine whether or not to display an effect on the display effect device 11, the speaker unit 12, and the game state display LED unit 13. and notifies the player of the lottery results of big wins (bonus wins), small wins, replays or losses.

The main control unit 100 determines that a combination is established when predetermined symbols are displayed side by side on the effective line of the window portion 3 in each variable display game of the general game, and game medals are awarded according to the payout table shown in FIG. It is paid out from the payout device 18 and discharged from the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁

In a big bonus game (BB game) in which three red 7s are aligned, the BB game mode is terminated when the character continuous operation device is activated and the number of acquired tokens exceeds 360. In addition, in a regular bonus game (RB game) in which three blue 7s are aligned, the RB game mode is terminated when the character continuous operation device is activated and the number of acquired coins exceeds 120.

Then, after completing the game main processing of step S170, the main control unit 100 returns to step S130 and repeats the processing sequentially.

FIG. 23 is a drum pattern layout table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, a belt (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern and a right drum pattern are drawn goes around the outer circumference of each drum. affixed to.

Each belt has 21 different patterns drawn, and although it is irregular, the patterns that activate the bonus are "Pentagon (red)", "Pentagon (blue)", and "Pentagon (white)". , "Red 7", "bell", "square (red)", "square (blue)", "square (white)" of the symbols that make up various small wins, and replays of the symbols that activate replay are drawn. is In addition, the three types of pentagonal patterns also serve as minor winning patterns.

FIG. 24 is a symbol combination display determination diagram.

When all the three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 determines the combination display of symbols related to winning and operation on the effective line of the window part 3 according to the number of inserted game medals (dedicated to three general games). conduct.

FIG. 24(B) shows the effective line when three prescribed number of game medals are inserted. down), 2nd line (lower, middle, upper: upward right), 3rd line (upper, middle, upper: V-shaped) and 4th line (lower, middle, lower: mountain-shaped or inverted V-shaped) one is enabled. In addition, in the bonus game (RB: when the first type special accessory is activated), the specified number of game medals is two, but the effective lines are exactly the same for the first to fourth lines.

FIG. 25 is a payout table when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game, the prescribed number is 3).

When all the three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 performs combination display determination of winning or operation-related symbols on the effective line (see FIG. 24) according to the number of inserted game medals. In this case, the effective line is the same regardless of the number of inserted coins (three or two).

(1) Bonus role (RB: first class special role): one of (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) on the left drum 2a, and (pentagon (red), Pentagon (blue), Pentagon (white)) or any of ((Pentagon (red), Pentagon (blue), Pentagon (white)) on the right drum 2c stops on the effective line. , the number of wins is 0, and then the regular bonus game is given.There are 27 types (3.times.3.times.3) of combinations of symbols for the bonus combination, and if a single internal winning is made, the order of stop operation of the stop button portion 10 is determined. The symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined bonus symbols stop on any one of the activated lines regardless of the timing or timing, and a prize is always won. Although it is designed to end, there is no increase or decrease in medals because the number of medals inserted is 2 and a small winning combination of 2 is always won. If the player is configured to miss a small winning combination, the number of medals will be reduced in the same way as in the normal state, and the player will be put in a disadvantageous state.In the initial state (RT0 state: replay probability is about 1/7.3). , when the bonus combination (RB) is internally won (conditional device is activated), the winning probability of the replay changes from the next game, and a high-probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability of about 1/1.8) is entered. When the regular bonus game due to the activation of the bonus role is completed (activation terminated), the probability of winning the replay changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state). The variable display game is played in this game state, and this initial state is the normal game in the game (see FIG. 26).

(2) Red 7 small win (FR1: 1st target small win): The name of the winning combination when the red 7 symbol on the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the right drum 2c are aligned on the effective line and stopped. , and the number of coins to be acquired (the number of coins to be paid out) is 15. When the red 7 small win is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR1 (fruit 1) is activated. FR1 has one type of combination symbol, and assuming that it is internally won by itself, regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button unit 10, the predetermined red 7 small winning symbol is on any one of the activated lines. The symbols are arranged so that the player can always win a prize by stopping. As will be described later, in the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the red 7 small wins are 1 small wins left 1 to 3, 1 small wins middle 1 to 3, and 1 small wins right 1 to 3 for pressing order control. It is designed to be elected at the same time as one of the three. The first target small combination is a small combination to be won, which is advantageous for the player.

(3) Bell small win (FR2: second target small win): This is the name of the win when the bell symbols are aligned on the activated line, and the number of wins is two. When a small bell win is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR2 (fruit 2) is activated. FR2 has one type of combination pattern, and if it is assumed that it is internally won independently, the bell pattern stops on any one effective line regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button part 10, and the prize is always won. The patterns are arranged as follows. As will be described later, in the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the small bell wins are the left 1-3, 1-small middle 1-3, and 1-3 right 1-ply small wins for controlling the pressing order. It is designed to be elected at the same time as any of the. It should be noted that the second target minor combination is a minor combination to be won, which is advantageous for the player.

The single small combination for pressing order control is a small combination for attracting the bonus combination described above (small combination for attracting a bonus). The winning red 7 small winning combination (first target small winning combination) or the bell small winning combination (second target small winning combination) wins, while the incorrect one small winning combination or simultaneous winning bonus winning combination wins. In the case of an incorrect answer, the probability of winning the bonus combination is 2/3.

(4) One piece small hand left 1 (FR3): A square (brown) pattern on the left drum 2a, a (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), or pentagon (white)) pattern on the middle drum 2b, right It is a role name when any of the patterns (9 types of pattern combinations) of (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) are aligned on the effective line and stopped on the drum 2c, and the number of winning is 1. becomes a sheet. When one small hand left 1 is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR3 (fruit 3) is activated. FR3 has 9 types of combined symbols, and assuming that a single internal winning is made, if the left stop button 10a is operated at the timing when the square (brown) symbol can be drawn, the other stop buttons 10 will stop in the order and timing. In spite of this, the symbols are arranged so that a predetermined one-sheet left one symbol stops on any one activated line and wins. Conversely, if the left stop button 10a is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be drawn, the game will be lost. It should be noted that 1 (01 in 2-bit binary number) is stored as push order data indicating that the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a in association with the one-piece small win left 1. However, it is also possible to create a logic by the pressing order determination program to guide that the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a if it is a one-piece small hand left 1, but it takes a long time to process. Due to the required data capacity, generally the push order data is stored.

(5) 1-piece small win left 2 (FR4): 1-piece small win left 1 is the same except that the symbol on the left drum 2a is changed to a square (blue) symbol, so the description is omitted.

(6) 1-piece small win left 3 (FR5): 1-piece small win left 1 is the same except that the symbol on the left drum 2a is changed to a square (white) symbol, so the description is omitted.

(7) 1 piece small hand 1 (FR6): Left drum 2a (Pentagon (red), Pentagon (blue), Pentagon (white)) design, middle drum 2b square (brown) design, right It is a role name when any of the patterns (9 types of pattern combinations) of (pentagon (red), pentagon (blue), pentagon (white)) are aligned on the effective line and stopped on the drum 2c, and the number of winning is 1. becomes a sheet. When 1 in the small winning combination is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR6 (fruit 6) is activated. FR6 has 9 types of combined symbols, and assuming that a single internal lottery is won, if the middle stop button 10b is operated at the timing at which the square (brown) symbol can be drawn, the stop operation order and timing of the other stop button units 10 will be changed. In spite of this, the symbols are arranged so that one symbol in a predetermined one-sheet small win is stopped and won on any one of the activated lines. Conversely, if the middle stop button 10b is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be drawn, the game will be lost. As described above, 2 (10 in 2-bit binary number) is stored as the pressing order data that means that the first stop operation is the middle stop button 10b in association with 1 in the small winning combination.

(8) 1-card small winning combination 2 (FR7): 1-card small winning combination 1 is the same except that the symbol of the intermediate drum 2b is changed to a square (blue) symbol.

(9) 1-card small winning combination 3 (FR8): 1-card small winning combination 1 is the same except that the symbol on the intermediate drum 2b is changed to a square (white) symbol.

(10) One piece small hand right 1 (FR9): (Pentagon (red), Pentagon (blue), Pentagon (white)) on the left drum 2a, (Pentagon (red), Pentagon (white)) on the middle drum 2b (blue), pentagon (white)), and a square (brown) pattern on the right drum 2c (9 types of pattern combinations) stop on the effective line, and the winning number is 1. becomes a sheet. When one small hand right 1 is internally won in the lottery, one conditional device of FR9 (fruit 9) is activated. FR 9 has 9 types of combination symbols, and assuming that an internal lottery is won independently, if the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the square (brown) symbol can be drawn, the stop operation order and timing of the other stop button units 10 will be changed. In spite of this, the symbols are arranged so that one symbol in a predetermined one-sheet small win is stopped and won on any one of the activated lines. Conversely, if the right stop button 10c is operated at a timing when the square (brown) symbol cannot be drawn, the game will be lost. As described above, 3 (11 in 2-bit binary number) is stored as the pressing order data that means that the first stop operation is the right stop button 10c in association with the one-piece small hand right 1.

(11) 1-card small winning right 2 (FR10): The 1-card small winning right 1 is the same except that the symbol on the right drum 2c is changed to a square (blue) symbol.

(12) 1-card small winning right 3 (FR11): 1-card small winning right 1 is the same except that the symbol on the right drum 2c is changed to a square (white) symbol, so the description is omitted.

(13) Replay (replay): This is the role name when three replay symbols are aligned on the activated line. Alternatively, even when winning is made simultaneously with other small combination or bonus combination, the replay is always activated. The replay consists of one type of combined symbol, and the player can operate the start lever 9 to play the next game without inserting medals. It should be noted that even if the replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning a replay).

This embodiment is intended to explain the basic configuration, and not only the above winning combination, but also rare small combinations such as cherry and watermelon, other special replay combinations, and red 7 replay combinations that are won only during the bonus game ( It is also possible to provide a replay combination in which 7 red symbols appear to be aligned on the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, or the lower horizontal line, which are invalid lines. When these rare small roles are internally won, an ART lottery is held, and when the red 7 replay role is internally elected, the ART is confirmed, and a plurality of sets of ARTs are given by lottery.

FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram showing game state transition diagrams and lottery probabilities of various combinations. FIG. 26(B) shows the lottery probability during the normal game, FIG. 26(C) shows the lottery probability within the RB, and FIG. 26(D) shows the lottery probability during the RB.

In FIG. 26(A), the general game (indicated as "general game" in the figure) starts from the game next to the end of the regular bonus game (RB game) or from the next game in which the step setting value is reset. . The replay probability (probability of winning the replay) in this general game is about 1/7.3.

When RB, which is a bonus combination, is internally elected and RB wins the game, the RB game is started from the next game. The RB game ends with 8 games or 8 wins, and from the next game onwards, a normal replay state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is low is entered. During the immersive game, the player repeats the normal game (decrease in medals in the normal replay state) -> RB wins internally -> RB wins -> RB game 8 times -> RB game ends -> normal game.

On the other hand, even if RB is internally won in the general game, if the winning of RB is avoided, an RT state is entered in which the bonus combination is internally won (while RB is inside) (see hatched area in FIG. 26A). In this RT state, there is no losing (not winning) as will be described later, so the player can play the variable display game in an advantageous game state.

During the normal game (see FIG. 26(B)), the RB number is 12000 and the winning probability is 12000/65536. The set number for simultaneously winning the RB, the small Bell combination and the small one-piece combination is 6000, and the winning probability is 6000/65536. The number of red 7 small wins and 1 small win at the same time is 23000, and the winning probability is 23000/65536. The replay number is 8978, and the winning probability is 8978/65536 (1/7.3). On the other hand, the probability of not winning (losing) is 15558/65536 (1/4.2).

In the RB (see FIG. 26(C)), the lottery for the RB is not performed, so the winning probability is zero. Note that "inside the RB" means that the RB flag is set and the RB has already hit. During this RB, a high-probability replay state (RT state) in which the winning probability of replay fluctuates is established. The lottery area of the RB number 12000 shown in FIG. 26B and the number 15558 that was not won (losing) becomes a new winning area for replay. Therefore, the original replay number of 8978, the number of entries of 12000 and the number of entries of 15558 are added to 36536. becomes. That is, the AT function is activated inside the RB where there is no loss, and the pressing order for winning the red 7 small win or the bell small win is announced, thereby allowing the player to efficiently acquire medals.

Calculating the expected value in the RB, the probability of winning the red 7 small hand is 23000/65536, and the number of increased numbers is 12 (15 payouts - 3 insertions), so 4.2 cards/game. Become. On the other hand, the probability of winning a small Bell combination is 6000/65536, and the number of increased coins is -1 (two payouts-three inserted), which means -0.09 coins/game. Even if the replay wins, the next game can be played without inserting medals, so there is no change in the expected value. Therefore, if the AT is activated inside the RB and the red 7 small win and the bell small win are won, the average increase will be about 4.1 cards/game, which is the maximum net increase in the 5th machine. can be achieved.

In the RB (see FIG. 26(D)), the number of small Bell wins is 65536, and the probability of winning is 100%. Since there are 2 payouts and 2 insertions, there is no increase or decrease in medals during this period. However, if you draw a lottery for multiple types of small wins and make it a specification that you will miss it in the order you press it, you can intentionally lower the expected value of the number of wins.

FIG. 27 is a conceptual diagram showing a simultaneous winning state of roles.

FIG. 27(A) shows a state in which RB, a small bell combination (FR2) and a small one-piece combination (FR3) are simultaneously won during a general game (normal time) (see FIG. 26(B)). Since the pressing order data for the one-piece small win (FR3) is 1, the left stop button 10a is the correct operation order.

FIG. 27(B) shows a state in which the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and the 1-card small winning combination (FR7) are simultaneously won during the general game (see FIG. 26(B)). Since the pressing order data for the single small win (FR7) is 2, the middle stop button 10b is the correct operation order.

FIG. 27(C) shows a state in which a red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and a 1-card small winning combination (FR11) are simultaneously won in the RB (see FIG. 26(C)). Inside the RB, the RB flag is naturally set, and the RB is also winning even if the lottery is not performed. Since the pressing order data for the single small win (FR11) is 3, the right stop button 10c is the correct operation order.

FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

For example, during a general game, if RB, a small bell combination (FR2) and a small combination of one sheet (FR3) shown in FIGS. 26(B) and 27(A) are simultaneously won by random number lottery, the RB flag and the FR2 flag are selected. and the FR3 flag is set.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the first stop while all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, the main control unit 100 controls the stored control information (the bell pattern is pulled in for the first left stop). ) (the order of pressing is "correct"), regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation after that, the stop control process always wins only the small bell combination, and two coins are awarded. pay out the medals of That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which three symbol rows are varied, and draws a combination (also referred to as a "symbol lottery") to determine RB, a small bell combination (second target small combination), and a pressing order. A one-sheet small winning combination (9 types of symbol combinations), which is a small winning combination, is internally elected at the same time. When the stop button part 10 is operated in the pressing order (left first) stored corresponding to the one-piece small winning combination, the bell pattern is stopped on the effective line to win the bell small winning combination. Further, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, the stop control is performed so that neither the RB or the one-piece small winning combination that is internally won at the same time is allowed to win.

FIG. 28A shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a for the first stop, No. No. 9 red 7 is at the reference position (a state in which No. 9 red 7 can be stopped immediately at the lower position of the left drum 2a; see FIG. 28B), the main control unit 100 moves the effective line. Pull-in control is performed so that only one bell pattern stops at any one of them. In this case, the number four frames above. 5 is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 28(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slips four frames and stops. Although the main control unit 100 can stop the square (brown) symbol of the one-piece small win (FR3) simultaneously won on the active line, it constitutes a small bell win with a large number of payouts. It stops the bell pattern. However, the main control unit 100 performs stop control so as to prioritize the minor combination symbols over the bonus combination symbols when both symbols can be pulled in with respect to the bonus combination and the minor combination.

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 29(A) is the same as FIG. 28(C), and in a state where the left drum 2a is stopped and the bell pattern is displayed in the lower row, when the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, , the main control unit 100, for example, No. 8 is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 29(B)). In addition, since the five bell patterns on the middle drum 2b are arranged at intervals of 4 frames at the farthest, any one of the bell patterns in the pull-in range can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b to create a ten-ply state. is possible. In addition, the tenpai state of FIG. 29(B) is synonymously referred to as a "reach state" of a predetermined combination.

29(B), when the player operates the right stop button 10c to stop the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, No. 7 is stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 29(C)). Since the six bell patterns on the right drum 2c are arranged within the interval of four frames, it is possible to arbitrarily stop any one of the bell patterns on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to win a prize. (Second line in the figure). When it stops at the upper stage, it becomes a strong bell and AT lottery is performed with a high probability.

FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 30(A) is the same as FIG. 29(A), and in a state where the left drum 2a is stopped and the bell pattern is displayed in the lower row, when the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop, , in the same manner as in FIG. 7 is stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 30(B)). In addition, since the six bell figures on the right drum 2c are arranged within four frame intervals, any one of the bell figures in the pull-in range can be stopped on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to create a ten-ply state. is possible.

In the ten-ply state of FIG. 30(B), when the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, No. 8 bell pattern is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 30(C)). In addition, since the five bell patterns on the middle drum 2b are arranged at intervals of 4 frames at the farthest, any bell pattern in the retraction range can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b to win a prize. (second line in the figure). That is, when any one of RB, small bell hand and left first small hand (FR3 to FR5) is won at the same time, if the first pressing order is the left stop button 10a, then any operation is possible. The bell small winning combination wins, while the RB or one piece small winning combination does not win. As a result, in the variable display games after the next game, a high probability replay state (RT state) during the internal winning of the RB is entered, so that the player can play the game without losing the prize. In the AT state, the sub control unit 160 uses the display effect device 11 and the speaker unit 12 to notify the predetermined first order (in this case, left first) for winning a small bell combination.

FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 31(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, like FIG. 28(A). In this state, the player presses the middle stop button 10b for the first stop, for example, No. When the stop operation is performed while the No. 1 pentagon (red) is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 1 pentagon (red) can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the middle drum 2b; see FIG. 31(B)), the main control unit 100 is located in the middle position of the middle drum 2b through which the effective line passes, and is located five frames above No. 17 pentagon (white) symbols are stopped (see FIG. 31(C)). As a result, the middle drum 2b slips four frames and stops. Note that the main control unit 100 can stop the bell pattern (No. 19) of the small bell win (FR2) simultaneously won on the active line. This means that the pressing order is wrong, so the pentagonal (white) pattern of the one-piece small win (FR3) within the range of the number of frames to be drawn is stopped on the effective line. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the player operates the middle drum 2b at the first stop, the pentagon (red) pattern and pentagons constituting the single small win (FR3) arranged at intervals of four frames at the furthest point. Either one of the (blue) pattern or the pentagon (white) pattern can be stopped at the middle position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not pull in the bell pattern is that the number of combinations of patterns when one small role pattern is drawn is 3 (square (brown), pentagon (white), pentagon (red/blue/white)). ), on the other hand, the number of symbol combinations is 1 when the small bell symbol is drawn, and in either case, the number of symbol combinations is greater for the 1-symbol small winning combination (FR3) than for the small bell winning combination. be. In other words, if the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, the symbols constituting the one-piece small win (FR3) can be pulled onto the activated line and stopped. And, since this single small winning symbol also serves as the RB symbol, it means that the symbols of both winning roles are drawn in as a result.

FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 32(A) is the same as FIG. 31(C), and in a state where the middle drum 2b is stopped and the replay symbols are displayed in the lower row, when the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop, , the main control unit 100, for example, No. The 3 pentagon (red) pattern is stopped on the lower stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 32(B)). The pentagon (red) pattern, the pentagon (blue) pattern, or the pentagon (white) pattern that constitutes the one-piece small win (FR3) are arranged on the right drum 2c at intervals of 6 frames, so they are within the pull-in range. Any pentagonal (red/blue/white) pattern can be stopped on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to enter a ten-ply state. In this case, not only the one-card combination (FR3) but also the RB combination is in a tenpai state (double tenpai state).

In the double tenpai state shown in FIG. 32(B), the player presses the left stop button 10a for the third stop. If the stop operation is performed when the bell symbol of No. 5 is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 will stop No. A 4 square (brown) symbol is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and a small combination (FR3) is won on the 4th line (see FIG. 32(C)). In addition, No. 10 discarded patterns ~ No. When the left stop button 10a is operated to stop when the square (brown) pattern of No. 4 is at the reference position, No. 4 is displayed. 4 square (brown) symbols can be stopped on the 1st line or the 4th line to win a small winning combination (FR3). In other words, the winning probability is 1/3 because the stop operation is performed within the range of 7 frames out of 21 frames. As a result, in the variable display games after the next game, a high probability replay state (RT state) during the internal winning of the RB is entered, so that the player can play the game without losing the prize.

FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in time series.

FIG. 33(A) shows the same double tenpai state as that of FIG. If the stop operation is performed when the discarded symbol of No. 3 is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 controls No. 3, which is two frames above. The 1 pentagon (red) pattern is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and the RB combination is won on the 4th line (see FIG. 33(B)).

Also, in the state of FIG. 33(A), the player presses the left stop button 10a for the third stop, No. 11 square (blue) is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 will stop the No. 11 three frames above. The pentagon (blue) pattern of 8 is stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a, and the RB combination is won on the 4th line (see FIG. 33(C)). That is, No. 1 to No. 3 or No. 11 to No. When the player operates the left stop button 10a to stop when any one of the 21 symbols is at the reference position, the RB symbol stops on the first line or the fourth line, and the RB combination is won. In other words, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 14 frames out of 21 frames, the RB combination is won, and the winning probability is 2/3. As a result, the next game will be a bonus game, and the player will play without increasing the number of medals. It should be noted that even when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop, the winning mode will be the same as a result, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in time series.

For example, during a general game, when the red 7 small winning combination (FR1) and 1 small winning combination (FR7) shown in FIGS. stand.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the first stop while all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, the main control section 100 controls the stored control information (the bell pattern is pulled in for the middle first stop). ) (the order of pressing is "correct"), regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation after that, the stop control process always wins only the red 7 small combination, and 15 pay out medals. That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which three symbol rows are varied, and draws a lottery to select a red 7 small winning combination (first target small winning combination) and a 1-sheet small winning combination that is a pushing order defined small winning combination ( 9 types of pattern combinations) are internally elected at the same time. When the stop button part 10 is operated in the pressing order (medium first) stored corresponding to the one-piece small winning combination, the bell pattern is stopped on the effective line to win the red 7 small winning combination. In addition, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, stop control is performed so as not to win the one-piece small winning combination that is internally won at the same time.

FIG. 34A shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the middle stop button 10b for the first stop, No. When the stop operation is performed while the bell symbol No. 8 is at the reference position (a state in which the pentagonal (blue) symbol No. 7 can immediately stop at the middle position of the middle drum 2b. See FIG. 34B), the main control unit 100 Pull-in control is performed so that the bell pattern stops on the effective line. In this case, the No. 5 frame above. 3 is stopped at the middle position of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 34(C)). As a result, the middle drum 2b slips four frames and stops. In this case, the main control unit 100 cannot stop on the effective line because the square (blue) symbol of the simultaneously won small win (FR7) is not within the drawing range.

FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 35(A) is the same as FIG. 34(C), and in a state where the middle drum 2b is stopped and the bell pattern is displayed in the middle row, when the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop, , the main control unit 100, for example, No. The bell pattern of 11 is stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 35(B)). In addition, since the six bell figures on the right drum 2c are arranged at intervals of three frames at the farthest, any one of the bell figures in the pull-in range is stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to enter the tenpai state. It is possible to

35(B), when the player operates the left stop button 10a to stop the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, No. 2 is stopped at the bottom of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 35(C)). Since the three red 7 symbols on the left drum 2a are arranged at intervals of 6 frames, any one of the red 7 symbols is stopped on the upper stage or the lower stage of the left drum 2a to win a red 7 small combination (FR1). (second line in the figure). Even if you operate the left stop button 10a for the second stop → the right stop button 10c for the third stop, the red 7 small win (FR1) will always win, and the winning mode will be the same as a result. Description is omitted.

FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 36(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, like FIG. 34(A). In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a for the first stop, for example No. When the stop operation is performed when the replay symbol No. 7 is at the reference position (a state in which the replay symbol No. 7 can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a; see FIG. 36B), the main control unit 100 determines that the effective line is No. 6, which is six frames above, is positioned at the upper stage of the passing left drum 2a. Stop the 1 pentagon (red) symbol (see FIG. 36(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slips four frames and stops. It should be noted that the main control unit 100 can also stop the red 7 symbol (No. 2) of the red 7 small hand (FR1), which is simultaneously won, on the active line. Since it means first and the pressing order is wrong, the pentagonal (red) symbol of the one-piece small win (FR7) within the range of the number of frames to be drawn is stopped on the effective line. In addition, no matter what timing the player stops the left drum 2a in the first stop, the pentagon (red) pattern that constitutes a single small win (FR7) arranged at intervals of 6 frames at the farthest, Either one of the pentagon (blue) symbol or the pentagon (white) symbol can be stopped at the upper or lower position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not draw in the 7 red symbols is that the number of combinations of symbols when drawing in one small winning symbol is 3 (pentagon (red), square (blue), pentagon (red/blue/white). )), on the other hand, the number of combinations of symbols is 1 when the red 7 small winning combination is drawn. because there are many. In other words, when the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, the symbols constituting the one-piece small win (FR7) can be drawn onto the activated line and stopped. It should be noted that this one small winning combination symbol also serves as the RB symbol, so if the RB is internally elected, it means that the symbols of both winning combinations are drawn in as a result.

FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in time series.

FIG. 37(A) is the same as FIG. 36(C), and in a state where the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) pattern is displayed on the upper stage, the player presses the right stop button 10c for the second stop. When the stop operation is performed, the main control unit 100, for example, No. The 3 pentagon (red) pattern is stopped on the lower stage of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 37(B)). The pentagon (red) pattern, the pentagon (blue) pattern, or the pentagon (white) pattern that constitutes a single small win (FR7) are arranged on the right drum 2c at intervals of 6 frames, so they are within the pull-in range. Any pentagonal (red/blue/white) pattern can be stopped on the upper or lower stage of the right drum 2c to enter a ten-ply state. In addition, since the one-piece minor combination symbol in the tenpai state also serves as the RB symbol, if the RB is internally elected, the result is a double tenpai state in which the symbols of both hands are drawn.

37(B), the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the third stop in the ten-pie state of the one-piece small win (FR7). If the stop operation is performed when the 16 square (white) pattern is at the reference position, the main control unit 100 will stop the No. 1 symbol five frames above. The 11 square (blue) pattern is stopped at the middle position of the middle drum 2b, and the one-sheet small win (FR7) is won on the first line (see FIG. 37(C)). In addition, No. 16 square (white) patterns ~ No. When the middle stop button 10b is operated to stop when the square (blue) pattern of No. 11 is at the reference position, No. 11 is at the reference position. 10 or No. 11 square (blue) symbols can be stopped on the first line to win a small winning combination (FR7). In other words, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 6 frames out of 21 frames, the probability of winning is 3/7. Even if the middle stop button 10b is operated for the second stop → the right stop button 10c for the third stop, one small winning combination (FR7) will be won or lost, and the winning mode will be the same as a result. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

The RB flag is set in the game inside the RB shown in FIG. When the small combination (FR11) is won at the same time, the FR1 flag and the FR11 flag are set. Therefore, as an internal state, the RB flag, the FR1 flag and the FR11 flag are set as a result (see FIGS. 26(C) and 27(C)).

When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop while all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, the main control section 100 controls the stored control information (the bell pattern is pulled in for the first right stop). ) (the order of pressing is "correct"), regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation after that, the stop control process always wins only the red 7 small combination, and 15 pay out medals. That is, the main control unit 100 starts a variable display game in which three symbol rows are varied, and draws a combination (also referred to as a "symbol lottery") to select RB, a red 7 small combination (first target small combination), and a pressing order. A single small winning combination (9 types of symbol combinations), which is a prescribed small winning combination, is internally elected at the same time. When the stop button part 10 is operated in the pressing order (right first) stored in correspondence with the one-piece small winning combination, the bell pattern constituting the red 7 small winning combination is stopped on the effective line to complete the red 7 small winning combination. win a prize. Further, as will be described later, if the pressing order is correct, the stop control is performed so that neither the RB or the one-piece small winning combination that is internally won at the same time is allowed to win.

FIG. 38(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c for the first stop, No. When the stop operation is performed when the No. 4 bell symbol is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 4 bell symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c, see FIG. Pull-in control is performed so that only one bell pattern stops at any one of them. In this case, the number four frames above. 21 is stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c (see FIG. 38(C)). It is possible to stop the bell pattern on the upper or lower stage of the effective line by stopping or sliding two frames. , 4 frames will be slipped and the game will stop, and the player who confirms this will expect to win ART. Similarly, there is also a "slip single small hand" for a strong hand. Note that the main control unit 100 can stop the square (white) symbol of the 1 small win (FR11) simultaneously won at the upper position on the activated line. The bell symbols that make up the winning combination are stopped on the active line. However, the main control unit 100 performs stop control so as to prioritize the minor combination symbols over the bonus combination symbols when both symbols can be pulled in with respect to the bonus combination and the minor combination.

FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 39(A) is the same as FIG. 38(C), and in a state where the right drum 2c is stopped and the bell pattern is displayed on the lower stage, when the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, , the main control unit 100, for example, No. 8 is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 39(B)). The five bell patterns on the middle drum 2b are arranged at intervals of four frames at the farthest, so any bell pattern within the pull-in range will be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b regardless of the timing of the stop operation. It is possible to put it in a tenpai state.

In the ten-ply state of FIG. 39B, when the player operates the left stop button 10a to stop the third stop, the main control unit 100, for example, No. 2 is stopped on the upper stage of the left drum 2a (see FIG. 39(C)). Since the three red 7 symbols on the left drum 2a are arranged at intervals of 6 frames, it is possible to win a prize by stopping any of the red 7 symbols on the upper or lower stage of the left drum 2a ( 1st line in the figure). If you aim at the red 7 pattern on the upper row and stop, it will be the strongest red 7 small role, and the AT lottery will be performed with a high probability (for example, a winning rate of 50%). On the other hand, in the case of a weak Red 7 small combination, the Red 7 symbol slides and stops at the lower position. Therefore, if the pressing order is correct, the RB internal winning state is maintained, so the player can play the game without losing.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 40(A) shows a state in which all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating, like FIG. 38(A). In this state, the player presses the left stop button 10a for the first stop, for example No. When the stop operation is performed when the replay symbol No. 7 is at the reference position (a state in which the replay symbol No. 7 can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the left drum 2a; see FIG. 40(B)), the main control unit 100 determines that the effective line is No. 6, which is six frames above, is positioned at the upper stage of the passing left drum 2a. Stop the 1 pentagon (red) symbol (see FIG. 40(C)). As a result, the left drum 2a slips four frames and stops. In addition, the main control unit 100 can stop the red 7 symbol (No. 2) of the red 7 small hand (FR1) which is simultaneously won on the active line. Since it means first and the pressing order is wrong, the pentagonal (red) symbol of the one-piece small win (FR11) within the range of the number of frames to be drawn is stopped on the effective line. Also, regardless of the timing at which the player stops the left drum 2a in the first stop, the pentagon (red) pattern and the pentagon (blue) that constitute the one-piece small win (FR11) arranged at intervals of 6 frames. ) Either one of the symbols or the pentagon (white) symbol can be stopped at the upper or lower position. However, the reason why the main control unit 100 does not draw the 7 red symbols is that the number of combinations of symbols when drawing a single small winning symbol is 3 (pentagon (red), pentagon (red/blue/white), quadrangle (white)). )), on the other hand, the number of combinations of symbols is 1 (red 7, bell, bell) when the red 7 small win symbol is drawn, and in any case, the one-sheet small win (FR11) is better than the red 7 small win. This is because the number of combinations of symbols is larger than the number of combinations. In other words, if the pressing order of the first stop is incorrect, any one of the symbols constituting the one-symbol combination (FR11) can be pulled onto the activated line and stopped. It should be noted that this one small winning combination symbol also serves as the RB symbol, so if the RB is internally elected, it means that the symbols of both winning combinations are drawn in as a result.

FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 41(A) is the same as FIG. 40(C), and in a state where the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) pattern is displayed on the upper stage, the player presses the middle stop button 10b for the second stop. , for example No. When the stop operation is performed when the pentagon (red) pattern of No. 1 is at the reference position (the state where the pentagon (red) pattern of No. 1 can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the middle drum 2b. See FIG. 41 (B)), the main control Part 100 is No. The 17 pentagon (white) pattern is stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b (see FIG. 41(C)). The pentagon (red) pattern, pentagon (blue) pattern, or pentagon (white) pattern that constitutes a small win (FR11) is arranged within 4 frame intervals on the middle drum 2b, so it is within the pull-in range. Any pentagonal (red/blue/white) pattern can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle drum 2b to put it in a tenpie state. In addition, the one-piece minor combination symbol in the ten-pie state also serves as the RB symbol, and since the RB is internally elected, the result is a double ten-pie state in which the symbols of both hands are drawn.

FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

FIG. 42(A) is the same as FIG. 41(C), in which the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) pattern is displayed in the upper row, and the middle drum 2b is stopped and the pentagon (white) pattern is displayed in the middle row. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c for the third stop, for example No. When the stop operation is performed while the replay symbol No. 5 is at the reference position (a state in which the replay symbol No. 5 can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c; see FIG. 42(B)), the main control unit 100 stops No. 5. Twenty square (white) symbols are stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c, and a small win (FR11) is won on the third line (see FIG. 42(C)). In addition, No. 5 replay pattern ~ No. If the right stop button 10c is operated to stop when the square (white) pattern of No. 20 is at the reference position, No. 20 will be displayed. 20 square (white) symbols can be stopped on the 1st line or the 3rd line to win a small winning combination (FR11). In other words, if the stop operation is performed within the range of 7 frames out of 21 frames, a small winning combination (FR11) will be won, so the probability of winning is 1/3. RB wins like this. Even if the right stop button 10c is operated for the second stop → the middle stop button 10b for the third stop, one small win (FR7) or RB will be won in the same way, and the winning mode will be as a result. Since it is the same, the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in time series.

FIG. 43(A) is the same as FIG. 42(A), in which the left drum 2a is stopped and the pentagon (red) pattern is displayed in the upper row, and the middle drum 2b is stopped and the pentagon (white) pattern is displayed in the middle row. In this state, the player presses the right stop button 10c for the third stop, for example No. When the stop operation is performed when the No. 7 bell symbol is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 7 bell symbol can be immediately stopped at the lower position of the right drum 2c), the main control unit 100 stops the No. 7 bell symbol. Four pentagon (red) symbols of 3 are slid and stopped on the lower stage of the right drum 2c, and RB is placed on the first line (see FIG. 43(B)). Also, in the state of FIG. 43(A), the player presses the right stop button 10c for the third stop, for example, No. When the stop operation is performed when the No. 16 red 7 symbol is at the reference position (a state in which the No. 16 red 7 symbol can immediately stop at the lower position of the right drum 2c), the main control unit 100 stops the No. 16 red 7 symbol. Four frames of 10 pentagon (blue) symbols are slid and stopped on the upper stage of the right drum 2c, and RB is placed on the third line (see FIG. 43(C)). In other words, if the operation order of the stop button unit 10 is incorrect, there is a probability of 1/3 that a small win will be won and the RB internal winning state will be maintained, while RB will win with a probability of 2/3 and the RB game will be terminated. When it starts and ends, it returns to the general game and becomes a hooked state in which there is a loss. That is, if red 7 small wins (FR1), bell small wins (FR2), and 1 small wins (FR3 to FR11) are won while RB is internally winning, in the next game variation display game, RB's internal winning win Since the high-probability replay state (RT state) is entered, the player can play the game without losing the prize.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing a symbol stop processing subroutine. A solid line indicates processing executed by the main control unit 100 , and a broken line indicates processing executed by the sub control unit 160 .

In the game main processing of step S170 in FIG. 22, the main control unit 100 executes a random number lottery (lottery for role or pattern lottery) in accordance with the player's operation of the start lever 9 (timing to receive the start signal). After calling the subroutine, the symbol variation display game is started by rotating the drum section 2. - 特許庁

The main control unit 100 outputs a notification signal (command, data, etc.) in step S200, and sends the lottery result and internal state (bonus flag, normal replay state or RT state, number of games played after the bonus, etc.) to the sub control unit 160. , and the process proceeds to step S210, which will be described later.

When the notification signal is received, the sub-control unit 160 determines whether any of the composite minor wins (see FIGS. 25, 26(B) and 26(C)) has been won based on commands, data, etc. in step SS100. is confirmed, and if the winning combination is not won, an effect corresponding to another winning combination is performed and the process ends.

In step SS110, the sub control unit 160 checks whether or not AT is in progress and the number of remaining games, and if there is no remaining number of games, the process proceeds to step SS120.

In step SS120, the sub control unit 160 checks whether or not the AT stock is present and the condition for releasing (activating the AT function) is satisfied. Move to

The sub-control unit 160 activates the AT function in step SS130, notifies the pressing order of the stop button operations corresponding to the internally won composite minor winning combination, and terminates this process. Specifically, this AT function is performed with the male voice saying "Left", "Center", "Right", and the female voice saying "Left", "Center", "Right". , is displayed on the display effect device 11 as an image.

When the process proceeds to step S210, the main control unit 100 moves to step S210, and if the internal winning is a composite minor win and the stop operation is performed in the pressing order corresponding to the composite minor winning combination (that is, if the pressing order is correct, ), the target minor winning combination is won in step S220, and the game ends. Although not shown in the figure, if the internally won combination is not a composite minor combination, a predetermined stop control is performed according to other internally won combinations, and the game ends.

When proceeding to step S230, the main control section 100 first stops one symbol that constitutes a small winning combination on the activated line without fail. When the process proceeds to step S240, if the timing of the subsequent stop operation matches, the main control unit 100 wins a bonus pull-in minor role in step S250, and ends the process. Transition.

When the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S260, if the bonus is internally won, the bonus combination is won in step S270. Stop and finish.

FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of an effect screen displayed by the display effect device.

The sub control unit 160 switches and displays the effect image displayed on the display effect device 11 according to the game state. FIG. 45(A) shows a daytime stage screen, which is used when the winning probability of AT is low. FIG. 45(B) shows a night stage screen, which is mainly used in a state where the winning probability of AT is high. Therefore, when this screen is displayed, the player is excited with anticipation of AT release. When a rare small combination (for example, middle stage cherry, strong watermelon, strong bell, etc.) is won, the sub-control unit 160 conducts an AT lottery (AT bonus release lottery) and a high probability lottery after that. When winning in this high probability lottery, the daytime normal screen is switched to the night screen, while a fall lottery is performed with a predetermined probability each time a replay is won during the AT high probability, so that the normal daytime screen is displayed during the general game. and the night screen are alternately displayed at a predetermined frequency. In general, these display screens change the time, weather, etc. according to the stay mode such as low probability state, high probability state, RB internal winning, etc., in order to suggest the correct mode to the player. The player's sense of expectation can be further aroused by appropriately performing an effect (fake effect). In addition, normal notification effects are executed according to various winning combinations.

FIG. 45(C) shows a thunder screen at night. When the player operates the start lever from the night stage screen to start the variable display game, the sub-control unit 160 determines that a predetermined condition such as winning a rare minor combination is met. An assist lottery (AT lottery) is carried out each time it is established. When the AT lottery is performed, the sub-control part 160 performs an effect of dropping thunder and thunder on the night stage screen in accordance with the operation timing of the stop button part 10 in order to inform the player of the fact. In addition, when the AT wins when the daytime stage is displayed, the daytime stage screen is abruptly changed to the night stage screen, and the thunder continuous performance is performed at least twice to suggest an AT release omen. Then, when the thunder effect is continuously performed three times from the daytime stage screen and the thunder is dropped three times in accordance with the operation timing of the stop button part 10, the determination of AT release (the determination of AT bonus) is announced. Therefore, by appropriately generating thunder and thunder, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation.

As another indication of the release of AT, the thunder screen at night is used continuously with the sound effect of "rumbling boom". In particular, during the predictive effect during the general game shown in FIG. 26, when "RB + bell small win + 1 small win" is internally won, the stop button unit 10 can be operated to stop along with the intense production of AT activation. After the frozen state where it cannot be performed, the pressing order for winning the small bell combination is announced. By this, it is possible to guide to the bonus internal winning state. Also, when the "red 7 small win and 1 small win" shown in FIG. 26 is internally won while the AT bonus is being released, the push order for winning the red 7 small win is notified.

The above-mentioned AT lottery is also called a navigation lottery (abbreviated name of "navigation lottery"), and when the AT function is activated, the sub-control unit 160 stops in order to win the push order small role (target small role). The operation order of the button part 10 is announced. In addition, when winning an AT lottery, the AT function is not immediately activated, but is added and stored as an AT stock (stored or stored), and a large amount of medals can be played by releasing at once at a desired timing. It is possible for people to acquire For example, after winning a special replay with 7 reds with a very low winning probability (a red 7 replay role that looks like 7 reds are aligned on the upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, or lower horizontal line, which are invalid lines) In the RT state (high-probability replay state), if you release all the AT stock of one set of 50 games and perform an AT lottery during the ART, the ART will continue endlessly without reducing the number of balls possessed by the RT. You can create lumps of balls.

FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of an effect screen displayed by the display effect device.

When notifying AT winning, the sub-control unit 160 displays the night stage screen again (see FIG. 46(A)) in the next variable display game after performing the thundering effect of FIG. 45(C), and presses the stop button. According to the operation of the unit 10, two bats with plates approach from a distance, gradually display the letters "BONUS" so that they can be recognized (see FIG. 46(B)), and finally fly away. Perform a bat announcement performance.

Also, from the state where the night stage screen is displayed, scroll the display screen to the right and the graveyard will be enlarged and the character's butler will excavate with a cry of "Ollah" and a sound effect of "Tirorororon". By causing the main character to appear from the raised grave in the center of the screen, it is possible to create a super-hot premium effect for the player (see FIG. 46(C)).

47 and 48 are schematic diagrams of effect screens displayed by the display effect device.

As described above, the sub control unit 160 displays the number of remaining games and the number of winnings on the upper right of the display effect device 11 when the first game is started by the operation of the player after notifying the winning of the AT bonus. Display the preparation state screen before ART activation (see FIG. 47(A)).

The sub-control unit 160 starts the first game during ART preparation, and when a composite small win (red 7 small win + 1 small win) is internally won at that time, the sub control unit 160 wins the red 7 small win, which is the target small win. The pressing order of the stop button unit 10 necessary for the operation is indicated by the number 1. In this case, the number 1, which means the first stop operation, is displayed in a large circle, and "Naka" is pronounced in the voice of Dracula or the main character (see FIG. 47(B)). Note that the red 7 small combination wins only when the first stop operation is correct, but if the stop operation is erroneous, one small combination (bonus pull-in small combination) wins or loses.

When the player correctly operates the middle stop button 10b, the sub-control unit 160 changes the character of the large circle in the center to OK and changes it to a small circle (see FIG. 47(C)).

When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop→the left stop button 10a for the third stop in the state of FIG. (see FIG. 48(A)), and then change the character "ANY" in the left circle to "OK". Finally, since the red 7 small winning combination is won, "15 GET" and the number of wins are changed to "15" (see FIG. 48(B)). For example, when the first stop operation is mistaken and the incorrect left stop button 10a is operated, the character "ANY" in the left circle is changed to "x", information necessary to win a small winning combination. to be notified. In this case, "blue", which means the square (blue) of the middle drum 2b to be aimed at, is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 48(C)). If the middle stop button 10b is operated at the correct timing, the square (blue) pattern is drawn and one small combination is won, so if the bonus is inside, winning of the bonus combination can be avoided. This point is an epoch-making original technology with an inventive step.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram of an effect screen displayed by the display effect device.

In the state of FIG. 48(B), when the next game is started by the player's MAX bet operation, the winning number is changed to "12". At that time, when "RB + small bell combination + 1 small combination" is internally won, the pressing order of the stop button part 10 required to win the small bell combination, which is the target small combination, is displayed by the number 1. - 特許庁In this case, the number 1, which means the first stop operation, is displayed in a large right circle, and the voice of Dracula or the main character pronounces "Migi" (see FIG. 49(A)).

When the player correctly operates the right stop button 10c, the sub-control unit 160 changes the character of the large circle on the right side to OK and changes it to a small circle (see FIG. 49(B)).

When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the second stop→the middle stop button 10b for the third stop in the state of FIG. ”, then change the letters “ANY” in the middle circle to “OK”. Finally, a small bell winning combination is won, and the bonus combination enters the RT state with internal winning (high-probability replay state; see FIGS. 26A and 26C). The sub-control unit 160 changes the screen display of the display effect device 11 to "2 GET/ART start", the number of remaining games to "50", and the number of winnings to "14" (see FIG. 49(C)). On the other hand, for example, when the first stop operation is mistaken and the middle stop button 10b of the incorrect answer is operated, the character "ANY" in the central circle is changed to "x", and it is necessary to win a small winning combination. information. In this case, "white", which means the square (white) of the right drum 2c to be aimed at, is enlarged and displayed (not shown, but similar to FIG. 48(C)). If the right stop button 10c is operated at the correct timing, a square (white) pattern is drawn in, one small combination is won, and winning of the bonus combination can be avoided, so that the inside state of the bonus can be maintained. This point is an epoch-making original technology with an inventive step.

When ART starts, (1) ``RB + small bell win + 1 small win'' or (2) ``RB + 7 small win + 1 small win'' shown in FIG. announces the order of operations for winning a small bell win or a 7 small red win, so the player can continue the game while maintaining the RT state and obtain a large amount of medals. In addition, when (3) "RB + replay" is internally won, one of the plural types of replays always wins, so there is no need to insert medals in the next game. It is also possible to change the winning replay combination according to the order of pressing. For example, when winning a red 7 replay (a replay in which the red 7s appear to be aligned horizontally) for presentation, the fall replay is avoided. In some cases, the sub-control unit 160 notifies the pressing order such as reverse pressing and avoidance procedures.

FIG. 50 is a drum pattern layout table.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, a loop band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so as to go around the outer circumference of each drum. affixed to.

Each drum band has 21 different patterns drawn on it. Red 7, White Bar", "Black Bar", "Bell 1", "Bell 2", "Bell 3", "Cherry", "Square (Red)" of patterns that make up various small roles and various replay roles, "Rectangle (blue)", "Rectangle (white)", "Pentagon (red)", "Pentagon (blue)", "Pentagon (white)", "Replay 1" and "Replay 2" are drawn.

FIG. 51 is a symbol combination display determination diagram.

When all the three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 determines the combination display of symbols related to winning and operation on the effective line of the window part 3 according to the number of inserted game medals (dedicated to three general games). conduct.

FIG. 51(B) shows an effective line when three prescribed number of game medals are inserted. horizontal straight line) is valid. Note that in the bonus game (RBB: when the first-class accessory continuous actuating device is activated), the specified number of game medals is three, and the activated line is exactly the same as the first line.

FIG. 52 shows a payout table and the like when the accessory is not activated (during a normal game, the specified number is 3).

When all the three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 performs combination display determination of winning or operation-related symbols on the effective line (see FIG. 52) according to the number of inserted game medals. In this case, the number of inserted cards is 3, and the effective line is only one horizontal line at the center.

(1) Bonus combination (RBB: continuous actuating device for first-class special accessories): Blue 7 on the left drum 2a, red 7 on the middle drum 2b, and white bar on the right drum 2c stopped on the effective line. It is the name of the role in the case, and the number of acquired cards is 0, and then a big bonus game (RBB game) is awarded. There is only one type of combination pattern of the bonus combination, and even if the internal winning is done independently, the predetermined bonus combination pattern does not stop on the effective line unless the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is matched, so that the next game and thereafter. will be carried over to This RBB game ends when the number of payouts (the number of winnings) exceeds 120, but the number of inserted cards is 3, and the expected number of payouts per game is less than 3 as described later. (For example, about 2), so when the RBB game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease in calculation (in other words, the expected value of increasing the number of medals in one RBB game is negative). In other words, the RBB game is in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In the normal game state (RT0 state: replay winning probability is about 1/7.3 of the predetermined value), if the bonus combination (RBB) is internally won (conditional device is activated), the replay winning probability is increased at least from the next game onwards. It changes to a high probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability about 1/5.5). When this bonus combination pattern is displayed (winning) and the RBB game by the activation of the bonus combination is completed (completion of operation), the replay winning probability changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state). In other words, the player will play the variable display game in any one of the RT0 state, RT1 state, and RBB game state. Note that this initial state (replay probability non-fluctuation state) is a transitional state (game preparation state) before transitioning to the RT1 state. Ship in the RT1 state. Similarly, since the internally won bonus combination rarely wins, the player rarely plays the BB game (see FIG. 53(A)).

(2) 1st small win (FR1: 1st target small win): One of the patterns (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the left drum 2a, and (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the middle drum 2b This is the name of the winning combination when any one of the symbols (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the right drum 2c is aligned on the effective line and stopped. When the first minor winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the FR1 (fruit 1) conditional device is activated. FR1 has 9 types of combined symbols (3×3×3), and assuming that a single internal lottery is won, the predetermined bell symbol will appear on the activated line regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button unit 10. Designs are arranged so as to stop and win without fail (the bell design is displayed in a straight horizontal line at the center). In most cases, the first minor winning combination is simultaneously won with a one-piece small winning combination (obstructing small winning combination) for controlling the pressing order in the RT0 state or RT1 state. The first target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the first target minor combination is notified.

(3) Second Small Win (FR2: Second Target Small Win): When the second small win is won, one of the patterns (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) is displayed on the upper stage of the left drum 2a, and on the middle stage of the middle drum 2b. Any one of (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) symbols, or any of (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) symbols are aligned and displayed on the lower stage of the right drum 2c, and the winning number (payout number) is 9 sheets. However, on the effective line, for example, Replay 2 stops on the left drum 2a, Bell 3 stops on the middle drum 2b, and Square (blue) stops on the right drum 2c (see FIG. 52(B)). When the second minor winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the conditional device of FR2 (Fruit 2) is activated. FR2 has 9 kinds of combined symbols (3×3×3), and assuming that a single internal winning is made, regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button unit 10, the predetermined symbols stop on the activated line. The patterns are arranged so that you will always win a prize (the bell pattern is displayed in a straight line downward to the right). As will be described later, in the RT0 state or RT1 state, the second minor combination is, in most cases, simultaneously won with a one-piece minor combination (obstructive minor combination) for pressing order control. Similarly, the second target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the second target minor combination is notified.

(4) 3rd Small Win (FR3: 3rd Target Small Win): When the 3rd small win wins, any of the patterns (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the lower stage of the left drum 2a, or on the middle stage of the middle drum 2b. Any one of (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) symbols, or any of (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) symbols are aligned and displayed on the upper stage of the right drum 2c, and the winning number (payout number) is 9 sheets. However, on the effective line, for example, a pentagon (white) is stopped on the left drum 2a, a bell 3 is stopped on the middle drum 2b, and a replay 1 is stopped on the right drum 2c (see FIG. 52(C)). When the 3rd small winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the FR3 (fruit 3) conditional device is activated. FR3 has 9 types of combined symbols (3×3×3), and assuming that a single internal winning is made, regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button unit 10, the predetermined symbols stop on the activated line. The patterns are arranged so that you will always win a prize (the bell pattern is displayed in a straight line upward to the right). As will be described later, in the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the third minor combination is, in most cases, simultaneously won with a one-piece minor combination (obstructive minor combination) for pressing order control. Similarly, the third target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the first target minor combination is notified.

(5) 1 small hand (obstructive small hand for push order control: FR4 to FRn): A small hand (bonus obstructive small hand) for preventing the above-mentioned bonus hand from being drawn in, and when winning, the number of acquisitions ( The payout number) is 1. Also, if any one of the first to third target small wins is simultaneously won and the pressing order is incorrect, it is a small win (bonus inhibiting small win) for preventing each target small win. It should be noted that n is an arbitrary integer, and is determined according to design needs, and as a result, the number of types of one-piece small wins is n+3.

(6) Middle stage cherry combination (FRn+1): This is the name of the combination when cherry symbols on the left drum 2a, and (ANY symbols) on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c stop on the effective line, and the winning number is 2. Become. When the middle stage cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one condition device of FRn+1 (fruit n+1) is activated. Even if the player operates the left stop button 10a near blue 7 when the middle cherry combination is internally won while the bonus combination is internally won, No. Without stopping the blue 7 symbols of 10 on the effective line, No. 7 pentagon (blue) or No. Since the 12 pentagons (white) are stopped and the middle stage cherry combination is awarded, the bonus combination is not awarded.

(7) Lower Cherry (FRn+2): Black bar on the left drum 2a (Cherry on the lower row), (Bell 1/Bell 2/Bell 3) on the middle drum, and (ANY symbol) on the right drum 2c. This is the name of the hand when all the cards are stopped on the line, and the number of acquired cards is two. When the lower cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one condition device of FRn+1 (fruit n+2) is activated. Even if the player operates the left stop button 10a near blue 7 when the lower cherry combination is internally won while the bonus combination is internally won, No. Without stopping the blue 7 symbols of 10 on the effective line, No. 7 pentagon (blue) or No. Since the 12 pentagons (white) are stopped and the lower cherry combination is awarded, the bonus combination is not awarded.

(8) Replay (replay): This is the name of a hand when Replay 1 or Replay 2 symbols are aligned on three drums on the activated line, and medals are not obtained for this. When an internal win is made, an RP flag is set in a flag area, and even when this is won alone or when a bonus combination is won simultaneously, a replay is always won and operated. The replay consists of 8 kinds of combinations of symbols, and the player can operate the start lever 9 to play the next game without inserting medals. It should be noted that even if the replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning a replay).

(9) Red 7 replay (replay): This is the name of a role when red 7 symbols are aligned on three drums on the effective line, and medals are not acquired for this. If you win internally, a red 7 RP flag will be set in the flag area, but you will always win at the same time as other replay roles (not shown). If you miss the push, one of the other replay roles will always win. Even when a bonus combination is won at the same time, one of the replays always wins and operates. It is used to clearly indicate to the player that an assist bonus (generally called a "third bonus") has been won. Red 7 replay is equivalent to the conventional big bonus. It should be noted that even if the red 7 replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning a replay).

(10) Blue 7 replay (replay): This is a role name when blue 7 symbols on the left drum 2a and red 7 symbols on the other two drums are aligned on the effective line, and medals are not obtained for this. If you win internally, a blue 7 RP flag will be set in the flag area, but you will always win at the same time as other replay roles (not shown), and red 7 replay will win only if the pressing order is correct and the operation timing is appropriate. If you miss the push, one of the other replay roles will always win. Even when a bonus combination is won at the same time, one of the replays always wins and operates. It is used to clearly indicate to the player that an assist bonus (generally called a "third bonus") has been won. Red 7 replay is equivalent to the conventional big bonus. It should be noted that even if Blue 7 replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (replay probability of winning).

This embodiment is intended to explain the basic configuration, and in addition to the winning combination described above, it is also possible to provide, if necessary, a rare small combination such as a watermelon or a chance eye, or other special replay combination. . When these rare small wins are internally won, an AT extra lottery may be conducted, or a lottery by the sub-control unit may be used to align the Red 7 replay wins in the AT and provide a plurality of sets of ATs.

FIG. 52(D) is an explanatory diagram of a pressing-order small winning combination in which a bell small winning combination (first to third small winning combinations: target small winning combination) is won when the pressing order is correct twice.

Push-order small wins (Middle 1) are bell small wins (1st to 3rd small wins) whose purpose is to win a prize, and multiple types of small wins that constitute a single small win group whose purpose is to prevent the bell wins from winning. One small winning combination (for example, Red 7-Square-Pentagon, etc.), and multiple types of other small winning combinations that constitute one small winning combination for the purpose of inhibiting the winning of the first small winning combination (eg, Red 7 - any of bells 1 to 3 - pentagon, etc.) is a small winning combination (see FIG. 52(D)). Note that description of other small one-card hands is omitted in FIG. 52(A).

When the variable display game is started, the main control unit 100 internally wins one of a plurality of pushing-order small wins by lottery, and according to the lottery result and the operation of the stop button unit 10, the left drum 2a and the middle drum. 2b and the right drum 2c (a plurality of symbol rows) are stopped at predetermined positions. The ROM 101 stores the operation order of the stop switches as operation order data (in this case, middle→left→right or 2-1-3) in association with a plurality of pressed order minor winning combinations to be drawn. In addition, the ROM 101 stores 9 payouts (predetermined number) for Bell small winning combination, 1 payout for 1 small winning combination, and 1 payout for other 1 small winning combination.

The main control unit 100 recognizes or confirms the operation sequence for winning the small bell combination among the internally won push-order small combinations (in this case, center→left→right). Further, the main control unit 100 creates a sliding frame number table for all the drum units 2 (the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b, and the right drum 2c) until the stop operation becomes possible, and performs the stop operation. (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-040355). This sliding frame number table is a stop control table that stores sliding frame number data for moving the drum unit 2 within a range of 0 to 4 frames relative to the stop operation position and stopping.

For example, No. of middle drum 2b. When the replay 2 symbol of 13 is on the activated line, when the middle stop button 10b of the correct answer pressing order is operated for the first stop, the main control unit 100 moves the middle drum 2b by four frames, and No. 9 bell 1 pattern is controlled to stop. No. of the left drum 2a. When the left stop button 10a in the order of pressing the correct answer is operated for the second stop when the blue 7 pattern of No. 10 is on the activated line, the main control unit 100 moves the left drum 2a one frame to No. 10. The bell 3 pattern of 9 is controlled to stop, and the first minor winning combination becomes a tenpai state. After that, when the right drum 2c is subjected to the third stop operation, any one of the Bell 1 to Bell 3 symbols is stopped on the activated line, and the first small combination (target small combination) is won. When the right stop button 10c of the incorrect pressing order is operated for the second stop, either the square pattern or the pentagon pattern is stopped on the effective line of the right drum 2c, and the other one-piece hand becomes tenpai. After that, another small winning combination wins. In addition, it is also possible to make another small winning combination win or lose. As an example, for the second minor winning combination, the replay-bell-square symbol stops on the activated line (see FIG. 52(B)). Also, in the third minor combination, the square-bell-replay symbol stops on the pay line (see FIG. 52(C)).

On the other hand, when the drum section 2 is all rotating, No. 1 of the left drum 2a. When the left stop button 10a in the incorrect answer pressing order is operated for the first stop when the blue 7 symbols of 10 are on the activated line, the main control unit 100 moves the left drum 2a three frames to No. Control so that the 7 pentagon (blue) pattern stops. Note that the No. of the left drum 2a. It is possible to stop the bell 3 symbol of 9, but the higher priority pentagon (blue) symbol is stopped. With the subsequent second stop operation and third stop operation, one small combination wins or loses. Since the right drum 2c is the same, the explanation is omitted.

53 and 54 are conceptual diagrams showing game state transition diagrams and lottery probabilities of various combinations. Fig. 53(B) shows the lottery probability during the normal game which is the initial state, Fig. 54(B) shows the lottery probability within the RBB, and Fig. 54(B) shows the lottery probability during the RBB (during the 1 type BB game). . The game state is maintained even if the step set value is reset.

In FIG. 53(A), the general game (indicated as "general game" in the figure) starts from the next game after the big bonus game (RBB game) is finished. The replay probability (probability of winning the replay) in this general game is approximately 1/7.3 (number 8978/65536) (initial replay state: state in which the replay probability does not change).

In the general game, when RBB, which is a bonus combination, is internally won and the RBB wins in the game, the RBB game is started from the next game. The RBB game ends when the payout of medals exceeds a predetermined number of 120, and from the next game, a normal replay state with a low probability of winning a replay combination is entered. It should be noted that it is almost impossible for the general game→the RBB to be won internally→the RBB prize to be awarded→the RBB game to pay out more than 120 cards→the RBB game to end→the general game. "Medium game") will be repeated. The general game can be said to be a so-called "preparation state" before shifting to the internal middle game. The set number of RBB is 2000, and the set number for simultaneous winning of RBB and one small winning combination (RBB winning inhibiting small winning combination) is 2558, and only the former can win RBB when internally winning. However, if you do not aim for 7 blue symbols, 7 red symbols and white bar symbols at the timing of internal winning, you will not win the prize, and even if you win, the game medals will only decrease, so it is advantageous for the player to win. no.

On the other hand, even if the RBB is internally won in the general game, if the RBB winning is avoided, a high probability replay state (RT1) is entered in which the bonus combination is internally won (inside the RBB) (see hatched area in FIG. 53A). ). In this RT1 state, there is no loss (no winning) as will be described later, so the player can play the variable display game in a very advantageous game state. In the RT1 state, the set number of losers may be set to about 1 to 10, and a freeze effect may be performed when a loser is drawn with a probability of 1/65536 to 10/65536 to add a large amount of assist function. In this case, the loss becomes a freeze trigger role or a freeze confirmation role.

During the general game (see FIG. 53(B)), the registered number obtained by summing the RBBs is 4558 (2000+2558), and the winning probability is 4558/65536. The set numbers of the first, second and third minor wins are 17000 respectively, and the winning probability is 17000/65536. The total winning probability is 51000/65536, and in this case, any one of the first to third minor winnings will be internally won with a probability of about 78%. However, although a plurality of different one-piece small wins are basically won at the same time in order to control the pressing order, the first to third small wins may be won singly. The middle cherry combination is 250, the lower cherry combination is 750, and the replay combination is 8978. However, basically, a plurality of different replay combinations are simultaneously won.

In the inside of the RBB (see FIG. 54A), the lottery for the RBB is not performed, so the winning probability is zero. Note that "inside the RBB" means that the RBB flag is set and the RBB has already hit and is carried over. During this RBB, there is a high probability replay state (RT state) in which the winning probability of replay fluctuates. The lottery area with the number 2000 in which RBB wins alone shown in FIG. 53(B) becomes a new winning area for replay. Therefore, 10978 is obtained by adding 2000 to the original replay number of 8978, and the probability of winning the replay is 10978/65536 (approximately 1/6) and the probability of not winning is zero. That is, inside the RBB where there is no loss, the assist function is activated, and the pressing order for winning the first to third small wins (nine target small wins) is notified to the player. Efficiently win medals. The number 2558 of the area where RBB and one small winning combination are simultaneously won is a winning area for only one small winning combination. Others are the same, so the description is omitted.

Calculating the expected value when the assist function is activated in the internal middle game, the probability of winning the 1st to 3rd small wins is 51000/65536, and the number of increased cards is 6 (9 payouts - 3 inserts). ), the number is 4.67 cards/game. On the other hand, the probability of winning two cherry hands is 1000/65536, and the number of increased cards is -1 (2 payouts - 3 thrown), so -0.03 cards/game. The probability of winning a 1-card small winning combination is 2558/65536, and the increase in the number of coins is -2 (1 payout - 3 insertions), so -0.08/game. Even if the replay wins, the next game can be played without inserting medals, so there is no change in the expected value. Therefore, if the AT is activated in the internal middle game and all the small wins including the 1st to 3rd small wins are won, the average number increases by about 4.56 cards/game. It is possible to achieve the highest net increase in the number of No. 5 machines.

In the RBB game (see FIG. 54(B)), the biggest difference from the internal middle game is that the 1st, 2nd and 3rd minor wins are simultaneously won, and the number of entries is 17000. This is what happened. In other words, in the internal middle game, the total winning probability of the first, second, and third small wins in which the winning areas are dispersed is 51000/65536, whereas in the RBB game, the winning areas are are overlapped, the probability of winning the same prize is reduced to 1/3 of 17000/65536. Of the remaining 34,000 numbers (51,000-17,000), 30,000 numbers and 10,978 numbers in the replay are lost in the RBB game (unwinnable: 40,978 numbers), and the other 4,000 numbers are one as an increasing hand. This is the area in which small wins are won. However, a lottery may be performed by setting the number of replays. In other words, in the internal middle game, since the winning areas of the first to third minor wins are dispersed, the target minor wins 1 to 3 with the payout number of 9 do not win at the same time, whereas the RBB In the game, since the winning areas of the first to third small wins match (or overlap), the target small wins 1 to 3 with 9 payouts are simultaneously won. As a result, game medals either decrease or do not increase in the RBB game.

Calculating the expected value of the number of games until the end of the RBB game, the probability that the 1st to 3rd small wins are simultaneously won is 17000/65536, and the number of payouts is 9, so 2 per game. .33 coins will be paid out. Since the probability of winning two cherry hands is 1000/65536 and the number of payouts is 2, the payout is 0.03 per game. The probability of winning a small win of 1 is 6558/65536, and the number of payouts is 1, so the payout is 0.10 per game. The total expected payout value per game is 2.46 (resulting in a decrease of 0.54 per game). Since the RBB game ends when more than 120 coins are paid out, it ends after about 49 games on average.

FIG. 55 is a conceptual diagram of a winning area for a small winning combination. Note that the RBB and winning areas of the replay combination are omitted.

The upper diagram of FIG. 55(A) shows the winning area of the small winning combination in the general game and the RBB internal middle game (see FIG. 53(A)), and the lower diagram shows the winning area of the small winning combination in the RBB game (see FIG. 53(A)). It shows the winning area. When the probability of winning a replay combination (replay combination) in the general game is a predetermined probability (1/7.3), the internal bonus game (symbol display game in which the carrying-over means carries over the internal winning state of the bonus combination). The probability that a replay combination is won in is a high probability higher than a predetermined probability. This game state is called a high-probability replay state.

The random number used for the winning combination lottery appears only once in one cycle within the range of 0 to 65535, and the main control unit 100 extracts one random number at the timing of the start operation. In the above figure, the first minor winning combination is won internally when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and the second minor winning combination is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n2 to n3-1. indicates that the third minor winning combination is internally won within the range of n3 to n4-1. As described above, the 1st to 3rd small wins form a push order small win by winning a plurality of 1-sheet small wins and a plurality of other 1-sheet small wins at the same time (Fig. 55 (B) to (D) are the same). If the pressing order is correct, the small bell combination that is the target small combination (appears to be a bell pattern displayed in a straight line. However, it can also be a V-shaped or reversed V-shaped) wins, and if the order is incorrect, 1 small combination and 1 other small combination. A small winning combination wins or loses. In other words, the main control unit 100 sets the probability of winning the replay combination to be higher than the predetermined probability in the symbol display game in which the internal winning state of the bonus combination is carried over, and sets the probability of winning the replay combination to be higher than the predetermined probability. A lottery for a combination is executed so that each player wins separately.

In the lower diagram of FIG. 55(A), the first minor winning combination is internally won in the range of the extracted random number from n1 to n2-1, and within that range, the first minor winning combination, the second small winning combination, It shows that the 3rd minor winning combination and all of the 1st through 3rd minor winning combinations are won at the same time. Then, a plurality of small wins and a plurality of other small wins that do not fall within the range of n1 to n2-1 are pushed out, and a small win group of one wins is won in the range of n2 to n2+α, and n2+α+1~ The main control unit 100 performs a lottery using a lottery table in which the probability of losing (non-winning) is increased within the range of n4, and as a result, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is calculated as the input per game. It is less than the number of sheets. In other words, the main control unit 100 controls the bonus game so that the expected value for increasing medals (game media) in one bonus game is negative.

As a feature of the present invention, the lottery table used in the bonus game has the same or larger number of small wins than the lottery table used in the general game and the RBB internal medium game, but the latter uses a plurality of presses. In the former, at least a part of a plurality of small wins wins at the same time, and they do not win. The lottery is done by increasing the probability. In other words, in the latter, a lottery region is formed in which the target small wins (small wins for the purpose of winning prizes) are not simultaneously won, but in the former, a lottery region in which the target small wins are simultaneously won and a non-win are formed. This is because it forms a lottery area.

In the lower figure of FIG. 55(B), the first minor winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination is internally elected when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and within that range, the first small winning combination and the non-pushing small winning combination are selected. , the second small winning combination, the first small winning combination, the third small winning combination of the non-push order small winning combination, and all of the first through third small winning combinations are won at the same time. As a result, there is no need to push out a plurality of one-piece small wins and a plurality of other one-piece small wins, and it is possible to disqualify all areas where the second and third minor wins were won. become.

In the lower figure of FIG. 55(C), the first minor winning combination of the pushing order minor winning combination is internally elected when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, the number of the third minor winning combination is equal, and the first minor winning combination and It shows that the second small winning combination, the third small winning combination and the second small winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination are won at the same time. It shows that α of the extrusion amount and the loss area are increasing.

In the lower figure of FIG. 55(D), the 1st small winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination is internally won within the extracted random number range of n1 to n2-1, the 2nd small winning combination is simultaneously won in some of them, and further In some cases, the 3rd minor winning combination is won at the same time, and in some areas where the 2nd minor winning combination was won, the 2nd and 3rd minor winning combinations are won at the same time, and in some other areas, only the 3rd minor winning combination is won. indicates that he will be elected. It shows that α of the extrusion amount and the loss area are increasing.

FIG. 56 is a conceptual diagram of a winning area for a small winning combination. Note that the RBB and winning areas of the replay combination are omitted.

The upper diagram of FIG. 56(A) shows the winning area of the small winning combination in the general game and the RBB internal medium game (see FIG. 53(A)), and the lower diagram shows the winning area of the small winning combination in the RBB game (see FIG. 53(A)). It shows the winning area. When the probability of winning a replay combination (replay combination) in the general game is a predetermined probability (1/7.3), the internal bonus game (symbol display game in which the carrying-over means carries over the internal winning state of the bonus combination). The probability that a replay combination is won in is a high probability higher than a predetermined probability. This game state is called a high-probability replay state. The random number used for the winning combination lottery appears only once in one cycle within the range of 0 to 65535, and the main control unit 100 extracts one random number at the timing of the start operation. The above diagram shows that the first minor winning combination is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and the second minor winning combination is internally won when the extracted random number is in the range of n2 to n3-1. there is

In the lower diagram of FIG. 56(A), the first minor winning combination is internally won in the range of the extracted random number from n1 to n2-1. It indicates that only the role is won. Then, a plurality of small wins and a plurality of other small wins that do not fall within the range of n1 to n2-1 are pushed out, and a small win group of one wins is won in the range of n2 to n2+α, and n2+α+1~ The main control unit 100 draws a lottery using a lottery table that increases the probability of losing (non-winning) within the range of n3, and as a result, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is changed to the number of insertions per game. less than In other words, the main control unit 100 controls the bonus game so that the expected value for increasing medals (game media) in one bonus game is negative.

In the lower figure of FIG. 56(B), the first minor winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination is internally elected when the extracted random number is in the range of n1 to n2-1, and within that range, the first small winning combination and the non-pushing small winning combination are selected. This indicates that only the second minor winning combination and the first minor winning combination are won. As a result, there is no need to push out a plurality of one-piece small wins and a plurality of other one-piece small wins, and it is possible to disqualify all areas in which the second minor win was won.

In the lower figure of FIG. 56(C), the 1st minor winning combination of the pushing order minor winning combination is internally won in the range of the extracted random number value from n1 to n2-1, and the 2nd minor winning combination is simultaneously won in some of them, and the 2nd minor winning combination is won at the same time. It shows that the 2nd minor win was won in a part of the win areas of the minor wins, and the push-out amount α and the loss area increased.

In the lower figure of FIG. 56(D), the 1st minor winning combination of the pushing order minor winning combination is internally won in the range of the extracted random number value from n1 to n2-1, and the 2nd minor winning combination is simultaneously won in some of them, and the 2nd minor winning combination is won at the same time. A second minor win is won in a part of the win areas of the minor wins, and α for pushing out increases, indicating that there is no losing area.

More specifically, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be started by setting three medals (the number of bets) for one game. By operating the start lever 9, the drum section 2 rotates, and by operating the stop button section 10, the drum section 2 is stopped, the display result is derived, and one game ends. Depending on the display result of the drum part 2, a winning of RBB, a small winning combination or a replaying winning combination is generated, but there is also a loss. By operating the start lever 9, it is determined in advance whether or not winning is permitted in a lottery, and a winning flag is set. When a small winning combination is won, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. When an RBB pattern is displayed and a prize is won in a general game or an RBB internal game, the game state shifts to an RBB game (special game state). The total number of medals paid out in the RBB game is accumulated and counted. In this example, a predetermined number of 120 medals is set for the RBB game, and when it is determined that the total number of medals paid out in the RBB game exceeds 120, the RBB game is terminated. If the winning RBB does not win a prize, the next game and thereafter will be the RBB internal game, and the RBB internal winning state. The winning probability of the replay combination in the general game is 1/7.3 (predetermined probability), but in the RBB internal middle game, it becomes a high probability replay state (high probability higher than the predetermined probability). The first small win, the second small win, and the third small win, which are a plurality of pushing-order small wins, are composite small wins in which the target small win and the inhibiting small win are won at the same time. The winning areas of the roles are all different (or at least partially different). Using this lottery table, it is determined whether or not a prize is allowed by lottery using random numbers. In the lottery table used in the RBB game, at least a part of the winning areas of the first, second and third minor wins are the same, and the first and second minor wins are selected in accordance with the extracted random numbers. Either the small winning combination or the third small winning combination is won at the same time. In terms of design, the numbers of the first to third minor wins are the same, the winning areas are all different in the general game or the RBB internal middle game, and the winning areas are all the same in the RBB game. It is desirable to In the RBB game, the area in which the winning is not possible is increased more than in the RBB internal game, and the expected value of the number of payouts per RBB game is less than the number of inserted coins per game.

In the RBB game, the conventional method is to increase the winning probability (set number) of a small winning combination. However, in the case of the present invention, the ratio (number) in which small wins are won is generally the same (or may be slightly increased) in the general game, the RBB internal middle game, and the RBB game. , The non-win area is created by overlapping the win areas of the composite small wins in the RBB game. As a result, the main control unit 100 controls the RBB game so that the expected increase in game media is negative during the period from the start to the end of one RBB game. In addition, referring to FIGS. 54(A) and (B), the ratio of overall winning of minor wins means that the first minor win is four in total, one target minor win and hindering minor wins 1 to 3. Assuming that the set number is 17000, the set number of the target minor hand is 17000, the set number of the hindrance hand 1 is 17000, the set number of the hindrance hand 2 is 17000, and the set number of the hindrance hand 3 is 17000. The number of entries is 17,000, and the total number of entries is 68,000. Assuming that the second and third minor wins are the same, the overall number is tripled to 204,000. In the RBB game, the first small target win, the second small target win, and the third small target win are simultaneously won. In addition, in the same lottery area, the same small hindrance wins 1 to 3 of the first minor win, the small hindrance wins 1 to 3 of the second minor win, and the small hindrance win 1 of the third minor win are selected so that the same minor hindrance wins do not overlap in the same lottery area. 1 to 3 are simultaneously won, and the remaining hindering small wins are pushed out to other lottery areas to be set numbers.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of minor combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 57(A) shows only one kind of bell pattern as the minor combination explicit identification information. FIG. 57(B) shows three types of bell 1 pattern, bell 2 pattern, and bell 3 pattern as the minor combination explicit identification information. Note that the small winning combination identification information is identification information for clearly indicating to the player that a small winning combination has been won, and may be of one type or two or more types (Fig. 57(B) There are three cases). Bell 1 pattern to bell 3 pattern have the same outer shape of the bell pattern based on yellow, but differ in that the colors of the ball portions are red, blue and yellow. Therefore, it looks like the same pattern to the eyes of the player (also called a similar pattern or a very similar pattern).

When the push-order bell small combination (generally, a small combination consisting of a target small combination and a hindering small combination) is internally won, the procedure for the stop button unit 10 to win the target small combination (for example, middle right left ), the main control unit 100 stops and displays the symbols that make up the target minor combination on the pay line, and displays the bell symbol (small combination explicit identification information) in a straight line (Fig. 57(C)). In the case of this figure, the winning line and the line displayed in a straight line are the same, but the line in which the bell pattern is displayed in a straight line is either upper or lower, diagonally ascending or diagonally downward, so as to be different from the winning line. good too.

On the other hand, in FIG. 57(D), when the push order bell small combination is internally won, when the stop button unit 10 is operated in a procedure for winning the target small combination (for example, in the order of right, left, middle), the main The control unit 100 stops and displays the replay 2 symbol, the bell 3 symbol, and the square (blue) symbol, which constitute the target minor combination, on the winning line, and displays the bell 1 symbol, the bell 3 symbol, and the bell 1 symbol ( Minor combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight downward-sloping straight line (see FIG. 57(D)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the target minor combination look scattered, the small bell combination explicit identification information appears aligned, so that the player does not feel any sense of incongruity.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 58(A) shows only one type of replay symbol as replay combination explicit identification information. FIG. 58(B) shows three types of replay 1 symbols, replay 2 symbols and replay 3 symbols as replay combination explicit identification information. The replay combination explicit identification information is identification information for clearly indicating to the player that the replay combination has been won, and may be of one type or two or more types (Fig. 58 (B ), there are three types). Replay 1 pattern to Replay 3 pattern are based on light blue. The replay 1 symbol and the replay 2 symbol differ in that the orientation of the character's face and the bubble position are different (that is, the symbol shapes are different). The Replay 1 symbol has the character facing left and the bubble on the left, whereas the Replay 2 symbol has the character facing right and the bubble on the right. The Replay 1 pattern and the Replay 3 pattern differ in the color of the Replay characters, which is black or white (that is, the colors are different). Therefore, it looks like the same pattern to the eyes of the player (also called a similar pattern or a very similar pattern).

When the replay combination is internally won, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation (for example, pressing left, middle, right or scissors in the left, right), the main control unit 100 displays the winning line. The replay symbols are stopped and displayed, and the replay symbols (replay combination explicit identification information) are displayed in a straight line (see FIG. 58(C)). In the case of this figure, the winning line and the line displayed in a straight line are the same, but the line in which the replay pattern is displayed in a straight line is set to be the upper or lower tier, diagonally ascending or diagonally descending, so as to be different from the winning line. good too. When the replay combination wins, the main control unit 100 lights up the number-of-insertions LED 4a. For example, if the number of games in which the replay combination has won is three, the same number of three is lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game.

On the other hand, in FIG. 58(D), when the replay combination is internally won, the stop button section 10 is operated in a predetermined order of operation (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, and the left first operation). , the main control unit 100 stops and displays the black bar pattern, the square (white) pattern, and the square (blue) pattern on the winning line, and displays the replay 3 pattern, the replay 1 pattern, and the replay 2 pattern in a straight line on the upper row. (See FIG. 58(D)). In other words, although the winning symbols of the replaying combination look loose, the replaying combination explicit identification information appears to be aligned in a straight line, so the player does not feel any sense of discomfort.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 59(A) is an example of a winning mode of the so-called bell replay role. When the bell replay combination 1 is internally won and the stop button unit 10 is operated in a predetermined operation order (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the left first operation), the main control unit 100 , the pentagon (white), square (white), and cherry symbols are stopped and displayed on the winning line, and the bell pattern (any one of the bell 1 to bell 3 patterns is acceptable) is displayed in a straight line on the upper row. (See FIG. 59(A)). In other words, although the winning pattern of the replayed bell role looks loose, the small combination identification information appears to line up, so the player thinks that the minor combination has won despite the fact that the replayed role has won. feel. Therefore, the main control unit 100 activates the timer to delay the lighting of the number-of-insertions LED 4a even though the replay combination is actually won. For example, the main control unit 100 starts timing (freezes on) when the bell replay combination 1 wins, and after 20 seconds (predetermined time) elapses, lights the inserted number LED 4a. On the other hand, if either the max bet button 8 or the start lever 9 is operated during timing, the main control unit 100 stops timing (freezes off) and turns on the inserted number LED 4a. For example, if the number of games in which the replay combination has won is three, the same number of three is lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game. As an effect, when a player who feels that he or she has won a small winning combination operates the max bet button 8, the main control section 100 lights up all the LEDs 4a for the number of inserted coins, so that the player can play the game in the same familiar operation procedure as when winning a small winning combination. becomes possible. In addition, when the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170 indicating that the assist function is being activated is ON, the left first operation (left middle right or left right middle) wins the bell replay combination and the small combination clear identification information. are aligned, the main control unit 100 turns off the external output signal 3 and notifies the hall computer of the end of activation of the assist function.

When the bell replay combination 1 is internally elected, when the stop button unit 10 is operated in another predetermined operation order (the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the right first operation), the main control The unit 100 stops and displays the Replay 3 symbols, the Replay 1 symbols, and the Replay 2 symbols on the winning line, and displays similar Replay symbols (however, only the same Replay symbols may be used) in a straight line in the middle row (Fig. 59). (B)). In particular, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the middle stop button 10b is operated in the third stop operation after the right fast operation, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170. to output the AT signal. This can indicate that the assist function has been activated. Although the similar replay symbols are stopped in a straight line in the middle stage, they may be stopped diagonally downward or diagonally upward.

When the bell replay combination 1 is internally elected, the stop button unit 10 is operated in a different predetermined operation order (the middle stop button 10b is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the middle first operation), and the pull-in range is reached. If there are 7 red symbols, the main control unit 100 stops the 7 red symbols on the winning line. When the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and 7 red symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 stops the 7 red symbols on the winning line. When the right stop button 10c is operated by the third stop operation and 7 red symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 stops the 7 red symbols on the winning line and displays the 7 red symbols in a straight line in the middle row. (See FIG. 59(C)). In other words, the red 7 replay combination can be won when the red 7 symbol is present within the pull-in range and the pressing order is the correct procedure of middle left and right. Then, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 1 of the external common terminal board 170 to output the pseudo BB signal. On the other hand, if the red 7 symbols do not exist in the pull-in range by the third stop operation, any one of the bell symbols is stopped (red 7 symbols, red 7 symbols, bell symbols). In this case also, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 1 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned ON. When the right stop button 10c of the incorrect answer procedure is operated in the second stop operation while the red 7 symbols are stopped in the middle stage of the middle drum 2b, and if the red 7 symbols are present in the retraction range, the main control unit 100 wins. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. However, even if the left stop button 10a is operated by the third stop operation and the red 7 symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 does not stop the red 7 symbols on the winning line, and any bell symbol is displayed. (bell symbol, red 7 symbol, red 7 symbol). In this case also, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 1 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned ON. When the bell replay combination 1 is internally won, the stop button part 10 is operated in medium fast, and if the red 7 symbols do not exist in the drawing range, the main control part 100 stops the replay 3 symbols on the winning line. Let By the subsequent stop operation, the Replay 2 pattern is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the left drum 2a, and the Replay 1 pattern is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the right drum 2c, and similar replay patterns (however, only the same replay pattern may be used) are displayed in a straight line on the middle stage. (see FIG. 59(D)).

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of replay combination explicit identification information.

FIG. 60(A) is also an example of a winning mode of the so-called bell replay combination. When the bell replay combination 2 is internally elected, when the stop button unit 10 is operated in a predetermined operation order (the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, that is, the left first operation), the main control unit 100 , the square (white), cherry, and pentagon (blue) symbols are stopped and displayed on the winning line, and the bell pattern (any one of the bell 1 to bell 3 patterns is acceptable) is displayed in a straight line at the bottom. (See FIG. 60(A)). In other words, although the winning pattern of the replayed bell role looks loose, the small combination identification information appears aligned, so that the player thinks that the minor combination has won despite the fact that the replayed role has won. feel. Therefore, the main control unit 100 activates the timer to delay the lighting of the inserted number LED 4a in the same manner as the bell replay combination 1 described above. For example, the main control unit 100 starts timing when the bell replay combination 1 wins, and lights up the inserted number LED 4a after a predetermined time elapses. On the other hand, if either the max bet button 8 or the start lever 9 is operated during timing, the main control unit 100 stops timing and turns on the inserted number LED 4a. For example, if the number of games in which the replay combination has won is three, the same number of three is lit. Then, when the start lever 9 is operated, the main control section 100 starts the next game. As an effect, when a player who feels that he or she has won a small winning combination operates the max bet button 8, the main control unit 100 lights up all of the LEDs 4a for the number of insertions, so that the player can play the game with familiar operations when winning a small winning combination. . In the state where the external output signal 3 is ON, the main control unit 100 outputs externally when the bell replay combination wins and the minor combination explicit identification information is aligned by the left first operation (left middle right or left right middle). The signal 3 is turned off to notify the hall computer of the end of activation of the assist function.

When the bell replay combination 2 is internally won and the stop button unit 10 is operated in another predetermined operation order (right first), the main control unit 100 displays replay 3 symbols and replay 1 symbols on the winning line. , the replay 2 symbols are stopped and displayed, and similar replay symbols are displayed in a straight line in the middle row (see FIG. 60(B)). In particular, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and the middle stop button 10b is operated in the third stop operation after the right fast operation, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 3 of the external centralized terminal board 170. to output the AT signal. This can indicate that the assist function has been activated. Although the similar replay symbols stop in a straight line in the middle stage, they may stop diagonally downward or diagonally upward.

When the bell replay combination 2 is internally won, the stop button unit 10 is operated in a different predetermined operation order (middle first operation), and if there are 7 red symbols in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 wins. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. When the left stop button 10a is operated in the second stop operation and blue 7 symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 stops the blue 7 symbols on the winning line. When the right stop button 10c is operated by the third stop operation and 7 red symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 stops the 7 red symbols on the winning line and also displays 7 symbols (7 blue symbols, 7 red symbols). pattern, 7 red patterns) are displayed in a straight line in the middle row (see FIG. 60(C)). In other words, when the pressing order is the correct procedure of middle left and right, and the red 7 symbol or the blue 7 symbol exists within the pull-in range, the blue 7 replay combination can be won. Then, the main control unit 100 turns on the external output signal 2 of the external common terminal board 170 to output the pseudo RB signal. On the other hand, if there are no red 7 symbols in the drawing range in the third stop operation, any one of the bell symbols is stopped (blue 7 symbols, red 7 symbols, bell symbol). In this case also, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 2 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned ON. When the right stop button 10c of the incorrect answer procedure is operated in the second stop operation while the red 7 symbols are stopped in the middle stage of the middle drum 2b, and if the red 7 symbols are present in the retraction range, the main control unit 100 wins. Stop the red 7 symbols on the line. However, even if the left stop button 10a is operated by the third stop operation and the blue 7 symbols are present in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 does not stop the red 7 symbols on the winning line, and any bell symbol is displayed. (bell symbol, red 7 symbol, red 7 symbol). In this case also, the replay combination wins, but the external output signal 2 of the external centralized terminal board 170 is not turned ON. When the bell replay combination 2 is internally won, the stop button unit 10 is operated in medium fast, and if the red 7 symbols do not exist in the drawing range, the main control unit 100 stops the replay 3 symbols on the winning line. Let By the subsequent stop operation, the Replay 2 pattern is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the left drum 2a, and the Replay 1 pattern is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the right drum 2c, and similar replay patterns (however, only the same replay pattern may be used) are displayed in a straight line on the middle stage. (See FIG. 60(D)).

FIG. 61 shows the arrangement of patterns on the drum.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, a loop band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so as to go around the outer circumference of each drum. affixed to.

There are 20 different designs on each belt, 7 patterns (7 patterns), BAR pattern, upper chili pattern, lower chili pattern, red watermelon pattern, green watermelon pattern, blank pattern, and bell. The design, blue lips, and white lips are drawn as shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. 51, the winning line (also referred to as "valid line") is only one center horizontal line, so the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the configuration of the small wins in order of pressing, and the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure.

In the pachislot industry, push order bells are generally used as push order small wins. There are eight kinds of push order bell roles, push order bell 1a to push order bell 4b, but the push order bell for the correct operation procedure for the left 1st is not provided (however, it may be provided depending on the design specifications). For the pressing order bell 1a, the correct operation procedure (the order data of middle left and right (213)) is stored in the ROM correspondingly. When the push-order bell 1a is won, FR1 (fruit 1 minor combination), FR2, FR3 and FR4 are internally won at the same time (flags are raised), and any one of FR1 to FR4 can win a prize. FR1 corresponds to a small target combination provided for the purpose of winning a prize. The winning symbols of FR1 are a bell symbol on the left drum 2a, a bell symbol on the middle drum 2b, and a bell symbol on the right drum 2c (hereinafter described in the order of left, middle, right). Nine medals or credits (both of which are "game value") can be obtained. This bell pattern is yellow-based clear identification information (see FIG. 57), and is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window when a prize is won. However, the number of bell symbols is not limited to one type, and a plurality of bell 1 to bell n symbols having slightly different shapes and colors may be provided as minor combination identification information.

Winning patterns of FR2 are a red watermelon pattern, a green watermelon pattern, a bell pattern, a blue lips pattern, or a white lips pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. Winning patterns of FR3 are blue lips, red watermelon, upper chili, 7 or green watermelon, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. Winning patterns of FR4 are a white ribbon pattern, seven patterns, a green watermelon pattern, a red watermelon pattern, or a lower chili pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. FR2, FR3, and FR4 are hindrance small wins, which are provided for the purpose of hindering winning of the target small win.

For the push order bell 1b, the correct operation procedure (order data of middle left and right (213)) is stored in the ROM correspondingly. When the pushing order bell 1b is won, FR1, FR2, FR5 and FR6 are internally won at the same time, and one of these four small wins can be won. The winning symbols in FR1, the winning symbols in FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. Winning patterns of FR5 are blue lips, red watermelon or upper chili patterns, red watermelon or lower chili patterns, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. Winning patterns of FR6 are a white ribbon pattern, 7 patterns or a green watermelon pattern, 7 patterns or a green watermelon pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. FR2, FR5 and FR6 are minor inhibitors.

The reason why the push-order bells 1 having the same correct operation procedure are provided is to prevent players from aiming for a one-symbol small winning combination by a stop symbol. For example, when the left drum 2a stops with a blue lip pattern and the middle drum 2b stops with a red watermelon pattern, if there is only the push-order bell 1a, the player aims at 7 patterns or a green watermelon pattern and intentionally wins FR3. However, due to the FR5 of the push order bell 1b, there is also the possibility of a red watermelon symbol or a bottom chili symbol, so as a result the player cannot aim for any of them.

For the push order bell 2a, the correct operation procedure (order data of middle right left (231)) is stored in the ROM correspondingly. When the pushing order bell 2a is won, FR1, FR2, FR7 and FR8 are internally won at the same time, and any one of these four small wins can be won. The winning symbols in FR1, the winning symbols in FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. Winning patterns of FR7 are a blue lips pattern, 7 patterns or a green watermelon pattern, 7 patterns or a green watermelon pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. Winning patterns of FR8 are white lips, red watermelon or upper chili patterns, red watermelon or lower chili patterns, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. FR2, FR7 and FR8 are minor inhibitors.

For the push order bell 2b, the correct operation procedure (order data of center, right, left (231)) is stored correspondingly in the ROM. When the pushing order bell 2b is won, FR1, FR2, FR9 and FR10 are internally won at the same time, and any one of these four small wins can be won. The winning symbols in FR1, the winning symbols in FR2, and the number of winning symbols are as described above. Winning patterns of FR9 are blue lips, 7 patterns, green watermelons, red watermelons, or lower chili patterns, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal can be obtained. Winning patterns of FR10 are a white ribbon pattern, a red watermelon pattern, an upper chili pattern, a 7 pattern, or a green watermelon pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal or the like can be obtained. FR2, FR9 and FR10 are minor inhibitors. The reason for providing the push order bell 2 with the same correct operation procedure is the same as the push order bell 1 .

FIG. 63 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the pressing order, and the right 1st is the correct operation procedure.

For the push order bell 3a, the correct operation procedure (order data of right, left, middle (312)) is stored in the ROM correspondingly. When the pushing order bell 3a is won, FR1, FR11, FR3 and FR4 are internally won at the same time, and one of these four small wins can be won. The only difference between the push order bell 3a and the push order bell 1a is that FR2 is changed to FR11. The FR11 winning patterns are a red watermelon pattern, a green watermelon pattern, a blue ripple pattern, a white ripple pattern, and a bell pattern, and when displayed on the winning line, one medal can be obtained. F11, FR3 and FR4 are minor inhibitors. Others are the same as those of the pushing order bell 1a, so the description is omitted (incorporated). The push order bell 3b, the push order bell 4a, and the push order bell 4b also have the same difference, so the description is omitted (incorporated).

FIG. 64 is a configuration diagram of a replay combination.

In the pachislot industry, a plurality of types of replay 1 symbols to replay n symbols (replay role explicit identification information) generally based on light blue are displayed in a straight line on the symbol display window, thereby recognizing the winning of the replay role to the player. I am trying to let However, it does not matter whether the linear display of the replay combination explicit identification information is on the winning line or not. On the other hand, as a winning mode of a special replay combination, a replay pattern, a replay pattern, a bell pattern, a cherry pattern, or the like are often displayed in a straight line on the right side.

In the case of this embodiment, when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation (left 1st operation, also referred to as "specific operation"), a prize is won, and the replay symbols are displayed in a straight horizontal line at the center. 1 and normal replay 2, and when the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, a prize is won, and the bell pattern (small winning clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line horizontally or downward to the right in the upper row, bell replay 1 and bell It has replay 2.

When normal replay 1 wins, RP1 (replay 1 role), RP2, RP3, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (flags are raised), and any one of these five REPLAY roles (replay roles) can win a prize. . The winning patterns of RP1 are blue or white lips on the left drum 2a, blue or white on the middle drum 2b, and blue or white on the right drum 2c. ), and when it is displayed on the winning line, it becomes a winning of a replay role (originally simply referred to as "replay"), and the next game is the insertion of game medals (buttons related to the storage device, etc.) (including providing game medals for use in games by operating the device). The blue lips and white lips are the replay combination explicit identification information (replay combination explicit identification information), and when winning, they are displayed in a straight line on the central horizontal line of the pattern display window. In the normal replay 1, both the initial state (the replay probability does not change) and the RT state (high-probability replay state) in which the bonus combination is internally won are drawn based on the random numbers extracted by the main control unit 100. be done.

The winning symbols for RP2 are a bell symbol on the left, a blue or white ribbon symbol on the inside, a seven symbol on the right, a red watermelon symbol or a green watermelon symbol. , a blue lips symbol or a white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the upper right oblique line of the symbol display window. The winning symbols of RP3 are a bell symbol on the left, a red watermelon symbol or a green watermelon symbol on the inside, a BAR symbol on the right, a lower chili symbol or a BRK (blank) symbol. A prize is won, and a blue lips symbol or a white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the lower horizontal line of the symbol display window.

The winning symbols of RP14 are a seven symbol on the left, a seven symbol in the middle, and a seven symbol or a BAR symbol on the right. A design, a seven design, a seven design or a BAR design are displayed in a straight line. As will be described later, depending on the operation sequence and timing of the stop button unit 10, only seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols are actually awarded, and the kick control by the main control unit 100 causes seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols to win. It is never displayed. The winning symbols for RP15 are the seven symbol or bell symbol on the left, the seven symbol in the middle, and the bell symbol on the right. lost).

When normal replay 2 is won, RP1, RP2, RP14, and RP15 are simultaneously internally won (flags are raised), and any one of these four REPLAY combinations can be won (the winning symbols are as described above). As will be described later, the RP 14 actually wins only seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols, depending on the operation order and timing of the stop button unit 10. No pattern is displayed. The main control unit 100 does not draw a normal replay 2 in the initial state, but draws a role lottery based on the extracted random numbers in the RT state in which a bonus combination (RBB or CBB of the character product continuous actuating device) is internally won. In other words, it means that the normal replay 2 becomes a lottery subject under the condition that the high-probability replay state is established.

When Bell Replay 1 is won, RP1, RP2, RP3, RP4, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (flags are raised), and any one of these six REPLAY roles can win a prize (RP1, RP2, RP3, The winning symbols for RP14 and RP15 are as described above). The winning symbols for RP4 are blue lips or white lips on the left, bell in the middle, seven on the right, and red watermelon or green watermelon. , the bell pattern (minor combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the lower right diagonal line of the pattern display window. When Bell Replay 1 is won, the main control unit 100 wins RP4 (second, The order of the third stop operation is irrelevant). On the other hand, when a button other than the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, the main control unit 100 executes stop control so as not to win RP4. For example, when the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, any one of RP1 to RP3 is won, and the blue lips symbol or the white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the symbol display window. do. When the intermediate stop button 10b is operated at the timing when the seven symbols can be pulled in by the first stop operation, the seven symbols are stopped inside. Similarly, when the left stop button 10a is operated at the timing at which the seven symbols can be pulled in in the second stop operation, the seven symbols are stopped to the left. Then, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing at which the seven symbols can be pulled in by the third stop operation, the seven symbols are stopped to the right, and the seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols are displayed on the central horizontal line of the symbol display window. Displayed in a straight line (RP14 winning). However, if it is operated at a timing (No. 7 red watermelon symbol position) where the BAR symbol can be pulled in but the 7 symbol cannot be pulled in, the bell symbol is stopped to the right and RP15 is won. In other words, even if the pressing order is correct, the RP14 seven symbols, seven symbols, and BAR symbols do not stop. Also, even if the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the seven pattern can be pulled in by the second stop operation, the bell pattern is stopped without stopping the seven pattern to the right. Therefore, if the pressing order is incorrect, RP15 will win instead of RP14. The main control unit 100 does not draw a bell replay 1 in the initial state, but draws a combination based on the extracted random numbers in the RT state in which the bonus combination is internally won.

When Bell Replay 2 is won, RP1, RP2, RP3, RP5, RP14, and RP15 are internally won at the same time (flags are raised), and any one of these six REPLAY roles can win a prize (RP1, RP2, RP3, The winning symbols for RP14 and RP15 are as described above). The winning symbols for RP5 are blue lips or white lips on the left, red watermelon or green watermelon on the inside, and top chili or BRK on the right. Then, a bell pattern (minor combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the upper horizontal line of the pattern display window. When Bell Replay 2 is won, the main control unit 100 wins RP5 on condition that the left stop button 10a is operated by the first stop operation and the left drum 2a (specific reel drum) is stopped (second, The order of the third stop operation is irrelevant). On the other hand, when a button other than the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, the main control unit 100 executes stop control so as not to win RP4. For example, when the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, any one of RP1 to RP3 is won, and the blue lips symbol or the white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the symbol display window. do. When the intermediate stop button 10b is operated at the timing when the seven symbols can be pulled in by the first stop operation, the seven symbols are stopped inside. Similarly, when the left stop button 10a is operated at the timing at which the seven symbols can be pulled in in the second stop operation, the seven symbols are stopped to the left. Then, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the BAR pattern can be drawn in by the third stop operation, the BAR pattern is stopped to the right, and the seven pattern, seven pattern, and BAR pattern are displayed on the central horizontal line of the pattern display window. Displayed in a straight line (RP14 winning). However, if it is operated at a timing (No. 4 blank symbol position) where the seven symbol can be drawn but the BAR symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol is stopped to the right and RP15 is won. In other words, even if the pressing order is correct, the RP14 seven symbols, seven symbols, and seven symbols do not stop. Also, even if the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the BAR pattern can be pulled in by the second stop operation, the bell pattern is stopped without stopping the BAR pattern to the right. Therefore, if the pressing order is incorrect, RP15 will win instead of RP14. The main control unit 100 does not draw a bell replay 2 in the initial state, but draws a combination based on the extracted random numbers in the RT state in which the bonus combination is internally won.

FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

In the game inside the RBB shown in FIG. 53(A), the RBB flag is set, and the game medium decreases inside the RBB (see hatched area in FIG. 53(A)) in the high probability replay state. The mainstream of recent slot machines is to repeatedly perform a normal game and a special game in which game media increase. The reason why the amount of game media decreases in the normal game is that the internally won push-order minor combination is lost. On the other hand, the reason for the increase in game media in the special game is that the operation order (or operation procedure) for winning the target small win (for example, the range of 8 to 15 payouts) of the internally won push-order small win ( This is because the player receives more payouts than the number of inserted coins (three). As a result, the expected value of the increase in the number of cards per game can be set to about 3 to 4 cards. It should be noted that the CBB (Second Class Special Accessory Continuous Actuation Device) may be in an internal winning state, but in this case, for example, when two cards are inserted, two cards are always paid out, and the CBB is terminated when the predetermined number is exceeded. Therefore, there is no increase or decrease in game media during the CBB game. Similarly, in the game inside the RB shown in FIG. 26(C), the RB flag is set. You may make it repeat the special game which increases. The symbol combinations for the bonus hands (RBB, RB, CBB) are described as BAR symbols on the left, green watermelon symbols in the middle, and red watermelon symbols on the right.

The main control unit 100 sets the FR1 flag to the FR4 flag when the pushing order bell 1a shown in FIG. Therefore, as an internal winning state, five flags, the bonus flag and the FR1 flag to FR4 flag, are set as a result. In addition, the main control unit 100 is designed to give priority to the small combination symbols over the bonus symbols, and perform control to draw them onto the winning line and stop them. That is, when a bonus combination and a minor combination are internally won at the same time, when both the bonus symbols and the minor combination symbols can be stopped on the winning line, the main control unit 100 preferentially places the minor combination symbols on the winning line. Stop on top.

The main control unit 100, until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed, based on the stored stop control data and the correct operation procedure (order data for middle left and right (213)), sets the number of sliding frames table. create. For example, at the first stop, the middle stop button 10b is No. Assuming that the blue lips design of No. 7 is operated at the position on the winning line, at that time, slide 4 frames to No. 7. The 3 bell pattern is stopped on the winning line. Naturally, No. When the blank symbol of No. 6 is operated at the position on the winning line, at that time, 3 frames are slid, and No. 6 is operated. Slide 2 frames when the blue lips design of No. 5 is displayed. At the time of the green watermelon pattern of 4, slide one frame, No. At the time of the bell pattern of 3, it slides 0 frames. In this manner, the number of sliding frames to move the reels is calculated in advance for all operation positions (total of 60 frame positions), and the reels are moved and stopped immediately after the stop operation.

When all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating (see FIG. 65(A)), the main control section 100 operates the middle stop button 10b for the first stop (see FIG. 65(B)). ), the middle drum 2b is stopped based on the sliding frame number data, and the common bell pattern of FR1 and FR2 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 65(C)). In this case, since it is the correct operation procedure, No. When the 7 blue lips pattern is operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames to No. 7. It shows that the 3 bell pattern is stopped on the winning line. In this state, there is a possibility that both FR1 and FR2 can win, but neither FR3 nor FR4 can win.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the second stop (see FIG. 65(D)), the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the bell pattern of FR1 is displayed as the winning line. Stop upward (see FIG. 65(E)). In this case, it is the correct operation procedure, so No. When the 12 upper Chile pattern is operated on the winning line, slide 2 frames and No. The 10 bell symbols are stopped on the winning line, indicating that FR1, which is a small combination with a large number of payouts, is in a tense state. When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the third stop, the main control unit 100 controls the right drum 2c to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and stops the bell pattern of FR1 on the winning line (Fig. 65 ( F)). In this case, only FR1 can win a prize (FR2 cannot win a prize), but bell patterns are arranged on the right drum 2c at intervals of 4 frames (or within intervals of 0 to 4 frames). can be stopped on the winning line (for example, No. 8 bell symbol), FR1 always wins. Therefore, when the target minor combination (FR1) of the pressing order of the bell 1a is won, the bell pattern (small combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window. However, the number of bell symbols is not limited to one type, and a plurality of bell 1 to bell n symbols having slightly different shapes and colors may be provided as minor combination identification information. Further, it is not always necessary to stop the minor combination explicit identification information on the winning line, and the bell pattern may be displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window even on the non-winning line.

FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

66(A) to 66(C) are exactly the same as those of FIGS. 65(A) to 65(C), so the description is incorporated. When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop (see FIG. 66(D)), the main control unit 100 controls the right drum 2c to stop based on the number of sliding frames data, and the blue lips of FR2 or the white The Lip symbol is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 66(E)). In this case, since it is an incorrect operation procedure, No. When the upper chili pattern of 9 is operated on the winning line, slide 3 frames and No. 6 white lips are stopped on the winning line, and FR2, which is a small winning combination with a small number of dividends but a large number of symbol combinations, is in a tense state. When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the third stop, the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and stops the blue or white FR2 symbol on the winning line. (see FIG. 66(F)). In this case, only FR2 has the possibility of winning (FR1 cannot win a prize), but blue lips or white lips are arranged at intervals of 4 frames (or within intervals of 0 to 4 frames) on the left drum 2a. Therefore, any one of the blue lips symbol or the white lips symbol can be stopped on the winning line (for example, No. 1 blue lips symbol), so FR2 always wins. Therefore, FR2 can be said to be a minor combination (second hindrance minor combination) for the purpose of inhibiting the winning of FR1 when the first stop operation is correct and the second stop operation is incorrect. In addition, it is also possible to drop FR2 with a probability of 1/2 to 1/4, but the small role to win at the same time becomes complicated as a mischief. Since it doesn't affect it so much, even if the second stop is an erroneous operation, FR2 is designed to always win.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 67(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 65(A), the description is used.

When all the drums of the drum section 2 are rotating (see FIG. 67(A)), the main control section 100 operates the left stop button 10a for the first stop (see FIG. 67(B)). ), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the blue lip pattern of FR3 or the white lip pattern of FR4 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, since it is an incorrect operation procedure, No. When the red watermelon pattern of 4 is operated on the winning line, it is slid three frames and No. FR3. 1 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 67(C)). This is because the combination symbols of FR3, which has a small number of dividends but a large number of symbol combinations, are drawn with priority. Become). In addition, originally, FR1's No. It is possible to stop the 20 bell symbols on the winning line, but FR3 prevents the winning of FR1. If the operation timing is different, the white lips symbol of FR4 will stop on the winning line, so that only FR4 has the possibility of winning. Therefore, it can be said that FR3 and FR4 are small wins (first hindering small wins) intended to hinder the winning of FR1 when the first stop operation is incorrect. For FR3 to win, the condition is that the red watermelon pattern or upper Chili pattern on the middle drum 2b and the seven pattern or green watermelon pattern on the right drum 2c stop. /2 and the right drum 2c are 1/2, so FR3 wins only with a probability of 1/4. Similarly, for FR4 to win, the condition is that the seven symbol or green watermelon symbol on the middle drum 2b and the red watermelon symbol or lower chili symbol on the right drum 2c stop. Since 2b is 1/2 and right drum 2c is 1/2, FR3 wins only with a probability of 1/4.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the probability of the red watermelon pattern or the bottom chili pattern of FR3 being 1/2. to stop it on the winning line (see FIG. 67(D), red watermelon pattern in this example). On the other hand, since the FR3 red watermelon symbol and the lower chili symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, they are stopped at the koboshi pattern (see FIG. 67(F)). When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the third stop in the state shown in FIG. 67(D), the main control unit 100 controls the right drum 2c to stop based on the slide frame number data, and the seven symbol of FR3 or the green watermelon is displayed. If the symbol is stopped on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, FR3 wins (see FIG. 67(E). Seven symbol in this example). In other words, when the pressing-order minor winning combination is internally won, if the left stop button 10a is operated in the first stop operation, only one small winning combination is won with a probability of 1/4, so the game medium can be consumed. It becomes possible. Then, when the player stops drums other than the left drum 2a (specific reel drum) by the first stop operation, a lottery for performing a specific game (for example, an assist game) is not performed, or the completed game is added to the ceiling game number. It gives a big penalty for not doing so. Even if the player were prepared for a penalty and operated the stop button section 10 in the order of right, middle, left, the game media would eventually decrease.

FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 68(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 65(A), the description is used.

With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 68(A)), the main control section 100 operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop (see FIG. 68(B)). ), the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the seven symbol or green watermelon symbol of FR3 or the red watermelon symbol or lower Chili symbol of FR4 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, since it is an incorrect operation procedure, No. When the 11 white lips pattern is operated on the winning line, slide one frame to FR3 No. It shows that the bottom Chile symbol of 10 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 68(C)). This is because the combination symbols of FR4, which has a small number of dividends but a large number of symbol combinations, are drawn with priority. Become). In addition, it should be noted that the FR1 No. Although it is possible to stop the 8 bell symbol on the winning line, FR4 prevents the winning of FR1. If the operation timing is different, the red watermelon symbol of FR4, the seven symbol or the green watermelon symbol of FR3 will stop on the winning line, so that only FR3 or FR4 can win. Therefore, it can be said that FR3 and FR4 are small wins (first hindering small wins) intended to hinder the winning of FR1 when the first stop operation is incorrect. FR4 wins only with a predetermined probability because the left drum 2a has a white ribbon pattern and the middle drum 2b has either a seven pattern or a green watermelon pattern. may be dropped).

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the FR4 seven symbol or the green watermelon symbol is displayed at a probability of 1/2. It is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 68(D), green watermelon pattern in this example). On the other hand, the FR4 seven symbol and the green watermelon symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line with a probability of 1/2, so they are stopped at the koboshi pattern (see FIG. 68(F)). When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the third stop in the state of FIG. If it is stopped on the winning line with a probability of /4, FR4 wins (see FIG. 68(E)). In other words, when the pressing-order minor winning combination is internally won, when the right stop button 10c is operated in the first stop operation, one small winning combination is won only with a predetermined probability (low probability), so the game medium is not used. It can be consumed. Note that the main control unit 100 also performs similar stop control for the other seven push order bells (the push order bell 1b to the push order bell 4b), so the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Normal replay 1 is a lottery target for both the general game and the middle game inside RBB shown in FIG. 53(A). On the other hand, normal replay 2, bell replay 1, and bell replay 2 are subject to lottery in the RBB internal game, but are not lottery in the general game. In other words, all replay hands are randomly selected for the first time in the game inside the RBB (see hatched area in FIG. 53A) in which the RBB flag is set and the high probability replay state is reached. The player basically repeats the normal game and the special game in which the assist function is activated in the game state inside the RBB, but the internally won RBB wins when it wins alone or in a single winning state. Sometimes, if you aim for the BAR pattern on the left, the green watermelon pattern in the middle, and the red watermelon pattern on the right, you will win, but such a situation is extremely rare, and if you win the RBB, you will only be penalized. Rather, since medals are reduced or remain the same in the bonus game (neither increase nor decrease), there is no attempt to win RBB. Also, even if the step set value is reset, the state inside the RBB is maintained, so the player plays the game in this game state.

The main control unit 100 sets RP1 to RP3, RP14 and RP15 flags when the normal replay 1 shown in FIG. Therefore, as an internal winning state, six bonus flags, RP1 to RP3, RP14 and RP15 flags are set as a result. Note that the main control unit 100 gives priority to the replay symbols over the bonus symbols, and performs control to pull the replay symbols onto the winning line and stop them. never do.

The main control unit 100 creates a sliding frame number table based on the stored stop control data, operation procedure, and operation position (operation timing) until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed. For example, at the first stop, the middle stop button 10b is No. Assuming that 15 bell symbols are operated at the position on the winning line, at that time, 4 frames are slid to No. 11 white lips are stopped on the winning line. Naturally, No. When 14 red watermelon symbols are operated at the position on the winning line, at that time, 3 frames are slid, No. When the lower Chile pattern of 13 is displayed, slide 2 frames. When the upper Chile pattern of 12, slide one frame, No. At the time of 11 white lips pattern, it slides 0 frames. In this manner, the number of sliding frames to move the reels is calculated in advance for all operating positions (total of 60 frame positions), and the reels are moved and stopped immediately after the stop operation.

The main control unit 100 operates the left stop button 10a for the first stop when all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 69(A)). Left 1st operation) (see FIG. 69(B)), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the blue lip pattern or the white lip pattern of RP1 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and No. When the 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames to No. of RP1. It shows that 11 white lips are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 69(C)). This is because the main control unit 100 is programmed to perform stop control so that RP1 wins when the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a stops first. At this point, only RP1 can win.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and selects either the blue lip pattern or the white lip pattern of RP1 as the winning line. stop on top. In this case, No. 10 shows a state in which the blue lips have stopped (see FIG. 69(D)). After that, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the blue lip pattern or the white lip pattern of RP1 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, No. 1 shows a state in which the blue lips symbol is stopped, and when RP1 wins, the replay combination explicit identification information (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the central horizontal line of the symbol display window (Fig. 69 (E )reference). FIG. 69(F) shows a case where the player operates the right stop button 10c (by pressing the scissors) at the second stop, and similarly stops. It is displayed in a straight line along the central horizontal line of the window (see FIG. 69(E)).

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 70(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 69(A), the description is used.

The main control unit 100 controls that the player stops at No. 1 at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated (operated in a specific operation procedure) at the timing when the second seven pattern can be drawn (see FIG. 70(B)), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, RP14 and RP15. The common seven symbol is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 70(C)). The main control unit 100 allows the player to press the left stop button 10a for the second stop, No. When operated (operated in a predetermined operation procedure. Left 2nd) at the timing when the 7 symbol of 2 can be drawn, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol common to RP14 and RP15 is placed on the winning line. Stop (see FIG. 70(D)). Then, the main control unit 100 causes the player to press the right stop button 10c at the third stop, No. When operated at the timing when the 7 symbol of 2 can be drawn (operated in a predetermined operation procedure. Right 3rd), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol of RP14 is stopped on the winning line, RP14 is won (see FIG. 70(E)), but when the third stop operation is performed at the timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol is stopped on the winning line and RP15 is won (not shown). On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 70(C), when the left 2nd operation is performed at the timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol of RP15 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 70(F)). In addition, in the state of FIG. 70(D), No. 5 or No. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the BAR symbol of RP14 can be pulled in, the main control unit 100 does not stop the BAR symbol of RP14 on the winning line, and the No. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. That is, in the case of the normal replay 1, when the seven symbols can be drawn in a specific operation order (in the order of left and right in the middle), three seven symbols are displayed in a straight line and RP14 is won, while the third stop Even if the BAR pattern is drawn in, RP14 does not win and RP15 wins. It should be noted that the main control unit 100 is designed so that the player presses the middle stop button 10b at the first stop. When the second seven pattern is operated at a timing when it cannot be pulled in, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the blue lip pattern or the white lip pattern is stopped on the winning line (not shown). By the subsequent operation, either RP1 or RP2 wins, and the blue lips pattern or the white lips pattern (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the middle of the pattern display window or in a straight line obliquely upward to the right (not shown). In addition, when the right 2nd operation is performed in the state of FIG. 70(C), the bell pattern is stopped, and the bell pattern is stopped by the third stop operation, and RP15 is won (the stop display mode is "bell pattern, seven Design, bell design").

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 71(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 69(A), the description is used.

The main control unit 100 controls that the player stops at No. 1 at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the bottom symbol of RP3 can be pulled in (see FIG. 71(B)), the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the bottom symbol of RP3 is placed on the winning line. Stop (see FIG. 71(C)). In this state, players other than RP3 cannot win prizes. The main control unit 100 allows the player to press the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, No. If operated when the lower Chile pattern of 12 is positioned on the upper stage, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid to No. 12. The 9 red watermelon pattern is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 71(D)). Further, when the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the No. 13 is located on the upper stage, the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid to No. 13. Stop 10 bell symbols on the winning line. When RP3 wins, a blue lips symbol or a white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed horizontally in the lower row of the symbol display window (see FIG. 71(E)). FIG. 71(F) shows a case where the player operates the left stop button 10a at the same timing in the second stop, and RP3 always wins anyway.

Normal replay 2 description (not shown):
The main control unit 100 sets RP1, RP2, RP14 and RP15 flags when normal replay 2 shown in FIG. Therefore, as an internal winning state, five flags, that is, bonus flags, RP1, RP2, RP14 and RP15 flags, are set as a result. Note that the main control unit 100 gives priority to the replay symbols over the bonus symbols, and performs control to pull the replay symbols onto the winning line and stop them. never do.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a (forward push or scissor push) at the first stop, the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and the blue or white lip symbol of RP1 is displayed. Any of the symbols is stopped on the winning line, and RP1 is won by the subsequent stopping operation. If you aim for the 7 symbol on the middle 1st, the 7 symbol on the left 2nd, and the BAR symbol on the right 3rd, RP14 will win, and (Seven, Seven, BAR) will be displayed on the central horizontal line of the symbol display window. be. If you miss it, you will win RP15 or RP1 with other symbols. When the right 1st stop operation is performed, RP2 is won, and the replay combination explicit identification information (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the upper right line of the symbol display window.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

The main control unit 100 sets RP1 to RP4, RP14 and RP15 flags when Bell Replay 1 shown in FIG. Therefore, as an internal winning state, seven bonus flags, RP1 to RP4, RP14 and RP15 flags are set as a result. Note that the main control unit 100 gives priority to the replay symbols over the bonus symbols, and performs control to pull the replay symbols onto the winning line and stop them. never do.

When the player operates the left stop button 10a for the first stop (operating in a predetermined operation procedure or left 1st operation) (see FIG. 72(B)), the main control unit 100 controls the left drum 2a based on the sliding frame number data. to stop either the blue lips symbol or the white lips symbol, which are symbols common to RP1 and RP4, on the winning line. In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and No. When the 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames to No. RP1 and RP4. It shows that 11 white lips symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 72(C)). This is so that when the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a is stopped first, the main control unit 100 stops either the blue lip symbol or the white lip symbol on the winning line. because it is programmed.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, the main control unit 100 stops the middle drum 2b based on the sliding frame number data, and stops the bell pattern of RP4 on the winning line. In this case, No. The bell pattern of 8 shows a stopped state (see FIG. 72(D)). This is because when the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (forward push or scissor push), the main control unit 100 is programmed to win RP4 in preference to other replay combinations. be. At this point, only RP4 can win. After that, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the right drum 2c is stopped and controlled based on the sliding frame number data, and either the RP4 seven symbol, the red watermelon symbol or the green watermelon symbol is placed on the winning line. stop. In this case, No. 2 seven symbols are stopped, and when RP4 wins, the minor combination clear identification information is displayed in a straight line on the lower right diagonal line of the symbol display window (see FIG. 72(E)). FIG. 72(F) shows a case where the player operates the right stop button 10c (presses with scissors) for the second stop, and like the forward press, the RP4 symbol is preferentially stopped. When a prize is won, the bell pattern (small winning combination identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window (see FIG. 72(E)).

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 73(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 72(A), the description is used.

The main control unit 100 controls that the player stops at No. 1 at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated (operated in a specific operation procedure) at the timing when the seven symbol of 2 can be drawn (see FIG. 73(B)), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, RP14 and RP15. The common seven symbol is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 73(C)). The main control unit 100 allows the player to press the left stop button 10a for the second stop, No. When operated (operated in a predetermined operation procedure. Left 2nd) at the timing when the 7 symbol of 2 can be drawn, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol common to RP14 and RP15 is placed on the winning line. Stop (see FIG. 73(D)). Then, the main control unit 100 causes the player to press the right stop button 10c at the third stop, No. When operated at the timing when the 7 symbol of 2 can be drawn (operated in a predetermined operation procedure. Right 3rd), the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the 7 symbol of RP14 is stopped on the winning line, RP14 is won (see FIG. 73(E)), but when the third stop operation is performed at the timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol is stopped on the winning line and RP15 is won (not shown). On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 73(C), when the left 2nd operation is performed at the timing when the seven symbol cannot be drawn, the bell symbol of RP15 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 73(F)). In addition, in the state of FIG. 73(D), No. 5 or No. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the BAR symbol of RP14 can be pulled in, the main control unit 100 does not stop the BAR symbol of RP14 on the winning line, and the No.20 BAR symbol is not stopped. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. In other words, in the case of Bell Replay 1, when a specific operation order (in the order of left and right in the middle) and seven symbols can be drawn in, three seven symbols are displayed in a straight line and RP14 is won, while BAR is awarded at the third stop. Even if the symbol can be pulled in, RP14 does not win and RP15 wins. It should be noted that the main control unit 100 allows the player to press the middle stop button 10b to No. 1 at the first stop. When the second seven pattern is operated at a timing when it cannot be pulled in, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the blue lip pattern or the white lip pattern is stopped on the winning line (not shown). By the subsequent operation, either RP1 or RP2 wins, and the blue lips pattern or the white lips pattern (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the middle of the pattern display window or in a straight line obliquely upward to the right (not shown). In addition, when the right 2nd operation is performed in the state of FIG. 73(C), the bell pattern is stopped, and the bell pattern is stopped by the third stop operation and RP15 is won (the stop display mode is "bell pattern, seven pattern , bell pattern”).

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

Since FIG. 74(A) is in exactly the same state as FIG. 72(A), the description is used.

The main control unit 100 controls that the player stops at No. 1 at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c is operated at the timing when the 14 blank symbols are positioned on the winning line (see FIG. 74(B)), the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and the red watermelon symbol of RP2 wins. Stop on the line (see FIG. 74(C)). In this state, the white lips are stopped at the upper stage, and it is already impossible to win anything other than RP2 or RP4. The main control unit 100 allows the player to press the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, No. 11 is positioned on the winning line, the middle drum 2b is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid to No. 11. 7 is stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 74(D)). In this case, No. It is possible to stop the 10 blue lips pattern, but the stop control is performed so that the amount of slippage is intentionally increased. In this state, the number of replay symbols is high, but it is already impossible to win anything other than RP2. Further, when the player presses the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the No. When operated when the 14 red watermelon pattern is positioned on the winning line, the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and 4 frames are slid to No. 1. Stop 10 bell symbols on the winning line. When RP2 wins, a blue lips symbol or a white lips symbol (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a diagonally upward right line in the symbol display window (see FIG. 74(E)). FIG. 74(F) shows a case where the player operates the left stop button 10a at the same timing in the second stop, and RP2 always wins anyway. However, depending on the operation timing of the right stop button 10c, RP1 (see FIG. 69(E)) or RP3 (see FIG. 71(E)) wins, and blue lips or white lips (replay combination explicit identification information) are symbols. displayed in a straight line on the display window.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order.

The main control unit 100 sets RP1 to RP3, RP5, RP14 and RP15 flags when Bell Replay 2 shown in FIG. Therefore, as an internal winning state, 7 bonus flags, RP1 to RP3, RP5, RP14 and RP15 flags are set as a result. Note that the main control unit 100 gives priority to the replay symbols over the bonus symbols, and performs control to pull the replay symbols onto the winning line and stop them. never do.

As in Bell Replay 1, the main control unit 100, until all the drums of the drum unit 2 rotate at a constant speed, based on the stored stop control data, operation procedure, and operation position (operation timing), slides the slide frame. Create a number table. The main control unit 100 controls the operation of the left stop button 10a by the player for the first stop (operating or Left 1st operation) (see FIG. 75(B)), the left drum 2a is controlled to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the blue lip symbol or the white lip symbol is stopped on the winning line (the bell symbol is displayed in the upper row). is displayed). In this case, the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a (left 1st), and No. When the 15 bell symbols are operated on the winning line, slide 4 frames to No. of RP1. It shows that 11 white lips symbols are stopped on the winning line (see FIG. 75(C)). This is because the main control unit 100 is programmed to perform stop control so that RP5 is won when the first stop operation is the left stop button 10a and the left drum 2a stops first. At this point, only RP1 or RP5 can win, but as will be described later, RP1 is stopped and controlled so that RP1 will not win with the left 1st operation.

When the player operates the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, the main control unit 100 controls the middle drum 2b to stop based on the sliding frame number data, and either the red watermelon pattern or the green watermelon pattern of RP5 is selected as the winning line. stop on top. In this case, No. 9 shows a state where the red watermelon pattern has stopped (see FIG. 75(D)). After that, when the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the right drum 2c is controlled to stop based on the data of the number of sliding frames, and either the upper Chile symbol or the blank symbol of RP5 is stopped on the winning line. In this case, No. 4 shows a state in which blank symbols are stopped, and when RP5 is won, a bell symbol (small winning combination identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the upper part of the symbol display window (see FIG. 75(E)). FIG. 75(F) shows the case where the player operates the right stop button 10c (pressing the scissors) at the second stop, and similarly stops. ) is displayed in a straight line on the upper horizontal line of the symbol display window (see FIG. 75(E)).

The main control unit 100 wins the bell replay 2 internally, and when operated aiming at the 7 symbol on the middle 1st, the 7 symbol on the left 2nd, and the BAR symbol on the right 3rd, RP14 is awarded, and the central horizontal line of the symbol display window. (Seven symbols, Seven symbols, BAR symbols) are displayed, while No. Even if the right 3rd operation is performed at the timing when the 7R symbol of RP 2 can be pulled in, the 7 symbol of RP14 is not stopped on the winning line, and the No. The 3rd prize bell symbol is stopped on the winning line. If you miss it, you will win another symbol RP15 (seven symbol, seven symbol, bell symbol), RP1 or RP2. When the right 1st stop operation is performed, RP3 is won, and the replay combination explicit identification information (replay combination explicit identification information) is displayed in a straight line on the symbol display window. If Bell Replay 2 or Bell Replay 1 is won internally during AT (during a special game in which the assist function is activated), the right 1st stop operation order (right left middle or right middle left). This solves the problem that the bell pattern (minor combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line even though no medals are paid out, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. In other words, the feature of the present invention is that when the bell replay combination is internally elected, the bell pattern (minor combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window in the left 1st, while the bell pattern is displayed in the pattern display window other than the left 1st. are points that are not displayed in a straight line. In addition, both the middle 1st and the right 1st can display the replay combination explicit identification information (replay combination explicit identification information) in a straight line on the symbol display window.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the processing procedure up to the start of ART.

The player plays the game (regular game and special game) in a high-probability replay state in which the bonus combination (RBB or CBB) explained in FIG. 53(A) is internally won. Then, a winning operation procedure that is advantageous for the player is notified.) is performed. On the other hand, it is not assumed that the player actually wins a bonus combination in the game hall to play the bonus game (RBB game or CBB game), and since the game is in a penalty state, the explanation is omitted.

When the power is turned on and the stage is set and the normal game is started ("game start" in the figure), the sub-control unit 160 determines by lottery either the normal mode (step S500) or the high probability mode (step S510). . In step S520, the sub-control unit 160 executes a lottery for AT (assist time, third bonus or pseudo-bonus) when a specific trigger role is internally won in the lottery based on random numbers performed by the main control unit 100 . If the AT lottery is not won in step S522, the sub control unit 160 performs a mode transition lottery in step S524, and proceeds to step S500 or step S510. For example, when a rare small combination (cherry, watermelon, chance eye, etc.) is won as a specific opportunity combination, a lottery for transition to the high-probability mode is performed, while when a replay is won, a lottery for transition to the normal mode is performed. In this high-probability mode, the sub-control unit 160 selects one of a plurality of lottery tables with different AT winning probabilities, and wins an AT with a high probability of about 10 to 100 times higher than in the normal mode. Let As a relief measure, even if the number of completed games reaches the ceiling, the AT is forced to win.

In this normal game, when an operation other than the left 1st operation is performed, the sub-control unit 160 generates a buzzing warning sound to notify the player of the penalty operation. This penalty operation is executed when a small winning combination is internally won, and when a "target small combination" that constitutes a small winning combination that should not originally win a prize wins, the AT lottery is not performed for a predetermined number of games. give a big penalty. In that case, even if a rare small win is drawn during the penalty period, the player cannot receive the AT lottery and cannot obtain any benefit in the game, so the player performs the left 1st operation (operating in a specific procedure) with a low rate of occurrence. of. Therefore, when the normal replay 1 or the normal replay 2 is internally won, the replay combination is won by the left 1st operation, and the replay combination explicit identification information is displayed in a straight line in the symbol display window. Then, the main control unit 100 immediately lights up all (three) of the inserted number LEDs 4a, and when the player operates the start lever, a winning lottery is performed and the game starts (however, 4.1 seconds must elapse between games). spinning the reels as a requirement). On the other hand, when the bell replay 1 or bell replay 2 is internally won, the main control unit 100 wins the replay by the left 1st operation, and the bell pattern (minor combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window. and call the bell replay processing subroutine.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing a bell replay processing subroutine.

When the main control unit 100 calls this subroutine, it starts timekeeping (for example, starts a 20-second timer) in step S600. The main control unit 100 determines in step S610 whether or not the start lever 9 has been operated. If it has been operated, the time measurement ends in step S640, and the process proceeds to step S650. If not, the process proceeds to step S620. Transition. The main control unit 100 determines in step S620 whether or not there has been an input, and if it has been input, it ends the timing in step S640 and proceeds to step S650, while if not, it proceeds to step S630. This "insertion" means directly inserting the game medal itself into the medal slot or operating the max bet button 8 (1 BET button operation may be used).

In step S630, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the predetermined time has passed. If the predetermined time has not passed, the process proceeds to step S610. When proceeding to step S650, the main control unit 100 turns on all (three) of the inserted number LEDs 4a, and terminates this subroutine. In other words, when Bell Replay 1 or Bell Replay 2 wins and the bell pattern (minor combination clear identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window, the inserted number LED 4a is turned on after a predetermined time is measured, but after a predetermined time has passed. The timing is canceled by the closing operation or the closing operation before timing. Even if the max bet button 8 is operated, the accumulated number of medals displayed by the reserved medal number display LED 4b does not decrease. Also, when medals are directly thrown in by the throwing operation, the number of inserted medals is added to the number of stored medals displayed by the stored number of medals display LED 4b. When the bell pattern (small winning combination identification information) is displayed in a straight line in the pattern display window due to the winning of the bell replay, the player has the illusion that the small winning combination has won, and operates the max bet button 8 in a familiar procedure. , the sense of incongruity is not caused by processing in this way. Similarly, when the start lever 9 is operated before the predetermined time is counted, the clock is stopped and the input number LED 4a is turned on. The reason why the bell replay is provided is that the normal game is in a high-probability replay state, and the replay wins frequently, so that the player is given an impression as if he had won a small winning combination of three payouts.

Returning to FIG. 76 and continuing the description, when the AT lottery is won in step S522, the sub control unit 160 draws an AT type lottery (step S526) for determining the pseudo big bonus or pseudo regular bonus. An AT stock number lottery (step S528) and a portent game number lottery (step S530) are performed. The number of portent games is the number of games required until the player is notified of the winning of the AT, and the transition to the portent mode in step S532 continues for about 8 to 32 games. In step S534, the sub-control unit 160 performs an AT win confirmation effect (for example, a display effect of "bonus confirmation"), and performs a preparatory game until a replay combination is won and bonus symbols are displayed (step S536). For example, if a pseudo-big bonus is determined by the AT type lottery, continue the bonus confirmation display (WIN display), and if normal replay 1 or bell replay 1 is won, the middle left and right operation order and "777" are aimed. indicate. When the player aims at the seven symbol with the middle 1st, aims at the seven symbol with the left 2nd, and aims at the seven symbol with the right 3rd, and 777 is displayed, the process proceeds to step S538 to start the AT game. Similarly, in the case of the pseudo-regular bonus, when the normal replay 2 or the bell replay 2 is won, the operation order of middle left and right and "77 BAR" are displayed. When the player aims at the seven symbol in the middle 1st, the seven symbol in the left 2nd, and the BAR symbol in the right 3rd, and 77BAR is displayed, the process proceeds to step S538 to start the AT game. However, if the operation timing is wrong even if the pushing order is correct, the replay combination of other symbols wins, and "777" or "77BAR" is not displayed, but if the pushing order is correct, the AT game is started. do.

In step S540, the sub control unit 160 performs an additional lottery each time a specific opportunity role that triggers an additional lottery is internally won, and the number of won AT additions (the number of games, the number of games, the number of winnings of small winning combinations in the order of pressing, etc.) Alternatively, the number of stocks (the number of sets, the number of loops, etc.) is displayed on the display effect device 11 . As a matter of course, the sub control unit 160 adds the additional number to the remaining number and displays it on the display effect device 11 or stores it in the RAM.

Specific triggers include, for example, a single cherry, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, a strong chance, and a weak chance. The expected number of games to be added (expected value) is an average of 100 games for single cherry, 50 games for strong cherry, 20 games for weak cherry, 75 games for strong watermelon, 10 games for weak watermelon, and 10 games for strong watermelon. There are 200 games and an average of 30 games for weak chances, and the sub-control unit 160 performs a random number lottery using the addition lottery table corresponding to each specific opportunity combination to determine the number of additions. The single cherry extra lottery table has 5% for 500 games, 5% for 200 games, 50% for 100 games, 30% for 50 games, and 10% for 0 games (losing). It is allocated, and the added average value is 100 games. For example, a random number from 0 to 99 is generated, and the extracted random number is 0 to 9 for 0 games (losing), 10 to 59 for 100 games, 60 to 89 for 50 games, 90 to 94 for 200 games, 95 to 99. 500 games are to be won. It should be noted that strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, strong chance number, weak chance number, etc. are addition lottery tables with the same configuration, and only the allocation, the number of winning games, and the number of expected addition games are different, so the explanation is omitted. do.

After proceeding to step S544, the sub control unit 160 determines whether or not the special addition condition is satisfied. For example, a special extra lottery is executed when a specific opportunity is won, and the condition is met if the win is won. This condition is also met when the opponent's HP (hit points) becomes zero in a battle between the hero and the enemy character and the hero wins. When the special addition condition is established in step S544, the sub control unit 160 proceeds to step S546 and selects one of the plurality of special addition zones. For example, special extra zone A is a zone where extra lottery is performed only for 3 games (expected extra value is about 30), special extra zone B is a zone where extra lottery is performed only for 5 games (expected extra value is about 50), special extra zone C is a zone in which an additional lottery is performed only between games until the continuation lottery is lost (the expected value of the additional lottery is about 100). The value won in this additional lottery (the number of games, the number of times of navigation, the number of payouts, etc.) is the numerical value for activating the assist function, and as in the above-mentioned additional lottery, the additional number is added to the remaining number and the display effect device 11 or stored in RAM.

In particular, when the special add-on zone D is selected, the special button 14 is repeatedly hit to perform a continuation lottery (puncture lottery or fall lottery) and an additional lottery for each operation, and lose the continuation lottery (puncture lottery). or winning the fall lottery) and the value won in the extra lottery is used as the extra number for activating the assist function, and this extra number is added to the remaining number to be displayed on the display performance device 11 and stored in the RAM. Remember.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing a processing subroutine for the special add-on zone D. FIG. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing the freeze effect processing subroutine.

When the sub-control unit 160 shifts to the special add-on zone D in step S546, either freeze effect 1 in which the 7 blue symbols are aligned in a straight line depending on the pressing order or freeze effect 2 in which the 7 red symbols are aligned in a straight line depending on the pressing order. It is determined by a lottery whether to let it go (step S700). In the case of red 7 symbols, only one special extra game is played, but in the case of blue 7 symbols, the special extra game is played two or more times (a plurality of times), which is advantageous for the player. The ratio of blue 7 patterns to be won is about 20%, and blue 7 patterns are aligned about once every 5 times.

After shifting to step S710, the sub control unit 160 waits for notification from the main control unit 100 that the freezing trigger GRP (group replay) 1 to GRP7 has been won, and if none of the group replays has been won, step S715 After the normal processing is performed in step S710, the process loops. For example, the normal process of step S715 is a process of activating the assist function and notifying the winning operation order when the pressing order minor combination is won. In other words, steps S710 and S715 can be said to be a standby state until the start of the special add-on game.

The group replay is an upper blue 7 replay in which the blue 7 symbols are displayed in a horizontal line on the upper row of the display window, and a blue 7 pattern is displayed in a straight line to the upper right of the display window (lower row blue 7, middle row blue 7, upper row blue 7). There are multiple replay roles, such as the blue 7 replay that rises to the right, the middle red 7 replay that the red 7 symbols are displayed horizontally in the middle row of the display window, and the lower normal replay that the normal replay symbols are displayed horizontally in the lower row of the display window. These are replay hands that are won at the same time, and the types and combinations of replay hands that are internally won at the same time are different between group replays. Due to this difference, the replays that are displayed after winning are made different according to the pressing order.

Referring to FIG. 79, main control portion 100 executes a lottery for a combination (symbol lottery) when a symbol display game start operation is performed in step S800, and notifies sub-control portion 160 of an internal winning combination (lottery result). do. Various information can be sent from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 160 as appropriate, and the game state and commands can be directly transmitted. I can't. In other words, only one-way communication from the main control unit 100 to the sub-control unit 160 is permitted, and two-way communication is not possible. In other words, the main control means is arranged to transmit information in one direction to the sub-control means, but not to receive information from the sub-control means.

The main control unit 100 determines in step S810 that any of the freeze triggers GRP (group replay) 1 to GRP7 has been won, and if it is a freeze trigger, the process proceeds to step S815. For example, the process proceeds to step S860, and normal processing such as stop control and payout of medals is executed.

Referring to FIG. 78, when the sub-control unit 160 receives notification that the freeze trigger role (in this case, GRP1) has been won from the main control unit 100 in step S710, in step S720 the winning symbol (symbol displayed in a straight line) is received. ), and if it is 7 blue symbols, the process proceeds to step S730, and the display operation order of the 7 blue symbols is notified. to be notified. After the next game (next symbol display game) is finished, the sub control unit 160 proceeds to step S760 and executes the special add-on game only once when the red 7 symbol is displayed. On the other hand, when the blue 7 symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S740, and in addition to the minimum one time, the special add-on game is played by the designated number of additions (1 to 255 times) notified from the main control unit 100. Run. Therefore, in the case of the blue 7 pattern, the number is at least 2 times and the maximum is 256 times. For example, assuming 5 times, the first special addition game is executed after the first symbol display game is completed, the second special addition game is executed after the second symbol display game is completed, and so on. After finishing the fifth symbol display game, the fifth special addition game is executed. That is, five special add-on games are played five times in succession. It should be noted that the main control unit 100 is required to perform a reel effect in a freeze state (a state in which the progress of the game is delayed) from the start of the next game until the normal operation of the stop button unit 10 becomes possible. Although the designated number of additions is determined and notified, the special addition game may be executed only the number of times determined simply by the sub-control section 160 .

Referring to FIG. 79, when the process proceeds to step S815, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the operation is in the freeze procedure corresponding to the freeze trigger role. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S860. As will be described later, the freezing procedure of GRP1 is the right 1st, the middle 2nd has 7 blue symbols, and the left 2nd has 7 red symbols. When proceeding to step S820, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a specific external collective terminal board signal (hereinafter also referred to as "collecting terminal signal") is ON. This specific gathering signal is a signal indicating that an assist bonus called a third bonus is in progress. In the case of internal winning, it is turned ON when it is operated in the operation order in which the replay combination explicit identification information is displayed instead of the left 1st, and conversely it is turned OFF when it is operated in the left 1st. In other words, the signal turns ON when the main control unit 100 recognizes that AT is generally in progress, but turns OFF when it recognizes that AT is not in progress. The main control unit 100 proceeds to step S830 if the collection signal is ON, and proceeds to step S860 if it is OFF. As a result, even if the freeze opportunity wins while the signal indicating the non-AT state is being output and the player accidentally operates the stop button in the freeze procedure due to the penalty operation, the main control part 100 does not perform the freeze performance. In other words, the main control unit 100 performs the freeze effect only when the player wins the freeze opportunity while the signal indicating the AT state is being output and the player operates the stop button in the freeze procedure.

When moving to step S830, the main control unit 100 executes delay processing 1 in step S840 when 7 blue symbols are displayed (right 1st, middle 2nd), while displaying 7 red symbols. If so (right 1st, left 2nd), delay processing 2 is executed in step S850. The delay process 1 is relatively long, about 20 seconds, and is provided for notifying that a special add-on game will be performed after a freeze effect using the reels is performed at the start of the next game. The delay process 2 is relatively short, about 5 seconds, and only announces that a special extra game will be played at the end of the next game. When these processes are completed, one game ends. Even if the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are not displayed in a straight line, the delay processing 1 or the delay processing 2 is executed as long as the operation order matches. In other words, the player does not lose money even if he or she cannot hit the target.

Referring to FIG. 80, when the next game is started by the start operation and the process proceeds to step S900, main control unit 100 executes a lottery for a role (symbol lottery), and determines the internal winning combination (lottery result) to sub control unit 160. , and in step S910, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the reel freeze effect are satisfied (that is, it is operated in the operation order of blue 7 symbol display corresponding to the freeze trigger combination). If the start condition is not satisfied, the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S990 and executes normal processing. Then, the number N of times the 7 blue symbols or the 7 red symbols are displayed in a straight line is determined by lottery, and the sub-control unit 160 is notified of the number of times N of the displays.

The main control unit 100 rotates all the reels in step S930, but the rotation is not for normal rotation control but for reel performance. When any one of the stop button units 10 is operated in step S940, the main control unit 100 causes the corresponding drum unit 2 to be temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped). This pseudo-stop does not stop the drum section 2 completely, but continues to slightly move up and down without changing the stop position. If at least one reel of the drum unit 2 is rotating and the corresponding stop button is not operated, one spinning reel will be released after a predetermined time (approximately 20 seconds) has elapsed. Since the reels are stopped in order from the left, the drum section 2 is stopped in a maximum of 60 seconds. Also, when the two reels are stopped, the reels are stopped so that the blue 7 symbols or the red 7 symbols are always in a tenpai state. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not N is 0 at step S950, and if it is 0, at step S980, the last reel is pseudo-stopped with a losing dot (non-linear display of 7 symbols) and a reel freeze effect is produced. When finished, the display LED 4f during production is extinguished. Then, the process proceeds to step S990 to execute normal processing, while if not 0, the process proceeds to step S960. That is, when N is 0, it means that the display has already been performed N times. However, the state in which the drum section 2 is quasi-stopped (temporarily stopped) may be the completely stopped state. By turning on the display LED 4f during the effect, it is clearly indicated to the player that it is a freeze effect using reels, but the stop button unit 10 is further operated, and the corresponding drum unit 2 is pseudo-stopped (temporary stop). In the case of stopping, the reel freeze effect is recognized by stopping beyond 190 ms from the stop operation. In other words, not the usual 5-frame control, but by sliding the reels for 6 or more frames, the player is given a sense of incongruity, and the reel-freezing effect is appealed.

In step S960, the main control unit 100 displays the blue 7 symbols or the red 7 symbols in a pseudo-stopped manner and displays them in a straight line, then rotates the reels upward to display the preparation symbols, and in step S970, determines whether the start lever 9 has been operated or not. It is determined whether a predetermined time (about 10 seconds) has passed, and the loop is continued until the condition is satisfied. If the start condition is satisfied, N-1 is calculated in step S975, and the calculation result is used as a new N, and the process proceeds to step S920. Transition.

81 to 87 are schematic diagrams showing the pattern display state of the window in time series. Group Replay 1 to Group Replay 7 will be described in detail using these figures.

Referring to FIG. 81, when group replay 1 (GRP1) is internally won, at least the top blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the bottom normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 81(A)), the main control section 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c and the second stop middle stop button 10b are operated, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tense (see FIGS. 81(B1) and 81(C1)), so the player can select any replay. It is not possible to determine whether will win the prize. When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the top blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 81 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop and the left stop button 10a for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tenned. (See FIG. 81 (B2) and FIG. 81 (C2)) If the middle stop button 10b is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 81 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 82, when group replay 2 (GRP2) is internally won, at least the upper right blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. The main control unit 100 controls that, while all the drums of the drum unit 2 are rotating (see FIG. 82(A)), the player aims at 7 blue symbols and 7 red symbols on each drum, and the first stop is performed. When the right stop button 10c and the left stop button 10a are operated for the second stop, both blue 7 symbols and red 7 symbols are tenned (see FIGS. 82(B1) and 82(C1)). It is not possible to determine whether will win the prize. When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the right rising blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 82 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop and the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tenned. (See FIG. 82 (B2) and FIG. 82 (C2)) If the left stop button 10a is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 82 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 83, when group replay 3 (GRP3) is internally won, at least the top blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the bottom normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 83(A)), the main control unit 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c and the left stop button 10a are operated for the second stop, only blue 7 symbols are tened (see FIGS. 83(B1) and 83(C1)). It can be determined (2 certainty: confirmed by the second operation). When the player operates the middle stop button 10b at the third stop, the top blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 83 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop and the middle stop button 10b for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tenned. (See FIGS. 83(B2) and 83(C2)) If the left stop button 10a is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 83(D2)).

Referring to FIG. 84, when group replay 4 (GRP4) is internally won, at least the upper right blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the lower normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 84(A)), the main control unit 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the right stop button 10c and the second stop middle stop button 10b are operated, only blue 7 symbols are tened (see FIGS. 84(B1) and 84(C1)). It can be determined (2 certainty: confirmed by the second operation). When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the top blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 84 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the right stop button 10c for the first stop and the left stop button 10a for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tenned. (See FIG. 84 (B2) and FIG. 84 (C2)) If the middle stop button 10b is operated at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 84 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 85, when group replay 5 (GRP5) is internally won, at least the top blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the bottom normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 85(A)), the main control unit 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b and the right stop button 10c are operated for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tense (see FIGS. 85(B1) and 85(C1)), so the player can select any replay. It is not possible to determine whether will win the prize. When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the top blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 85 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the left stop button 10a for the first stop and the right stop button 10c for the second stop, only the red 7 symbols are tended (Fig. 85 (B2) and FIG. 85 (C2)), the player can determine that the middle red 7 replay wins (2 definite: confirmed by the second operation). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 85 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 86, when group replay 6 (GRP6) is internally won, at least the top blue 7 replay, the middle red 7 replay, the bottom normal replay and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 86(A)), the main control unit 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b and the second stop left stop button 10a are operated, only the blue 7 symbols are tened (see FIGS. 86(B1) and 86(C1)). It can be determined (2 certainty: confirmed by the second operation). When the player operates the right stop button 10c at the third stop, the top blue 7 replay wins (see FIG. 86 (D1)). Since the winning line is the middle horizontal line, the actual winning symbols are naturally different. On the other hand, when the player aims at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum and operates the middle stop button 10b for the first stop and the right stop button 10c for the second stop, both the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols are tenpai. Therefore, the player cannot determine which replay wins (see FIGS. 86(B2) and 86(C2)). When the player operates the left stop button 10a at the third stop, the middle red 7 replay wins (see FIG. 86 (D2)).

Referring to FIG. 87, when group replay 7 (GRP7) is internally won, at least upper right blue 7 replay, lower normal replay, and a plurality of other replays are simultaneously won. With all the drums of the drum section 2 rotating (see FIG. 87(A)), the main control unit 100 allows the player to aim at the blue 7 symbols and the red 7 symbols of each drum, and at the first stop. When the middle stop button 10b is operated, the blue 7 symbols are stopped in the middle row and the red 7 symbols are stopped in the lower row (Fig. 87(B)), so the player can determine that the blue 7 replay is won (1st accuracy: 1st 1 operation to confirm). When the player operates the right stop button 10c for the second stop aiming at 7 blue symbols and 7 red symbols on each drum (see FIG. 87 (C1)), or operates the left stop button 10a (see FIG. 87 (C2 )), and when only the blue 7 symbols are tened and the player performs the third stop operation, the right rising blue 7 replay wins (see FIGS. 87(D1) and 87(D2)). In any other order of operation, the lower normal replay or one of the other replays always wins.

88 and 89 are schematic diagrams of special addition screens.

When the AT bonus is started in step S538 shown in FIG. 76, the sub-control unit 160 displays the initial assist quantity and the acquired number (0 at the start) at the bottom left of the screen, and displays the remaining assist quantity and number as the AT game progresses. Update the number of acquisitions. The assist quantity is the number of games played, the number of navigations, the number of payouts, etc., and is a numerical value for activating the assist function. For example, if the assist quantity is the number of games played, the assist quantity is decremented by 1 when one game is completed. If the assist quantity is the number of times of navigation, the assist quantity does not change even if one game is completed, and the assist quantity is decremented by 1 when an operation order for winning a small winning combination is announced. If the assist quantity is the number of payouts, the assist quantity does not change even if one game is completed, and when the operation sequence for winning a small winning combination is announced, the originally paid out number is subtracted from the assist quantity (that is, Even if the player presses in the wrong order, it is treated as winning and paid out (in a sense, it is similar to the number of times of navigation).

The sub-control unit 160 executes the special add-on game a plurality of times in step S740 shown in FIG. 78, or executes the special add-on game once in step S760. The sub-control unit 160 determines the remaining assist quantity (assumed to be 25 games in this case) and the acquired number (or the net increase number) before the start of a plurality of special add-on games with 7 blue symbols. In this case, assume 353) are displayed at the bottom left of the screen, and special time and the faces of enemy characters 1 to N are displayed on the right (N is the same number. (See FIG. 88(A)). In this state, when a predetermined number of 3 medals are inserted by operating the max bet button 8 and the start lever 9 is effectively operated, the sub control unit 160 subtracts 1 from the remaining assist quantity and displays 24. , 3 is subtracted from the acquired number to change it to 350 (see FIG. 88(B)). Then, a combination lottery is drawn according to the operation timing of the start lever 9, and a variable display game is started in which the reel drum is rotated. When the winning combination is internally won by lottery, the order of operation of the stop switches for winning the winning combination is displayed on the display screen, but is omitted in the figure. Since the add-on loop rate is determined based on the winning combination lottery result, the operation of the start lever 9 is a moment when the player feels full of strength. It is assumed that a strong bell combination with 15 payouts (a bell combination regardless of pressing order) is internally elected. That is, the sub-control unit 160 determines the add-on loop rate and the add-on table based on the combination lottery result in the most recent variable display game in which the special add-on lottery (continuous hit game) is performed.

The sub control unit 160 validates the operation of the special button 14 (push switch) when the condition for starting the special add-on game (continuous hit game) is satisfied, and determines whether or not to continue the special add-on game based on the timing of the operation. continuation lottery (or drop lottery for whether or not to stop) is executed each time the button is pressed with an additional loop rate. Also, an addition lottery for the amount of assistance to be added is executed using an addition table. On the other hand, when the max bet button 8 is operated, the number of additional games is determined based on the loop rate and the expected cancellation value. It should be noted that the same processing as that of pressing the special button 14 may be automatically performed when the cancellation is made. When the sub-control unit 160 ends the special addition game, it displays the total number of AT games obtained by the lottery for the number of games on the display effect device 11, and when returning to the AT game, adds a special addition to the remaining AT game number. The total number of AT games obtained by adding the total number of AT games obtained in the game is set as the new number of AT games. Then, when the pressing order minor winning combination is won for the number of new AT games, the operation order of the stop button part 10 is announced.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 88, when the sub control unit 160 receives a command indicating that the game has ended and a payout number command from the main control unit 100 after all the reels have stopped by operating the stop switch, The number of acquired coins is changed to 365, the special button 14 is made operable, and the message "hit the special button" or "hit the special button repeatedly" is displayed on the display effect device 11 (see FIG. 88(C)). After that, the player repeatedly hits the special button 14 nine times, and the number of additional games is 1 for the first time, 3 for the second time, 10 for the third time, 5 for the fourth time, 1 for the fifth time, 1, 7 for the sixth time. 50 wins in the 8th round, 1 in the 9th round, and 73 wins in total. That is, the 1st to 9th addition quantities are accumulated and counted, and the counted value is displayed. Note that FIG. 88C shows a state in which the next pressing operation (tenth pressing operation) has not been performed, and the operation of the special button 14 (pressing switch) is valid.

Referring to FIG. 89, sub control unit 160 repeatedly presses special button 14 in the state of FIG. 89(A)). When the max bet button 8 (input switch or input means) is operated, the final number of additional games is determined, and the special additional game (continuous hitting game) is ended. At this time, the sub control unit 160 temporarily displays the acquired additional game number “plus 150” on the display screen of the display effect device 11, and adds a new remaining assist quantity (150) to the remaining assist quantity of 24 ( 174 is displayed as the total remaining assist quantity (see FIG. 89(A)). In this state, when the predetermined number of 3 medals is inserted by operating the max bet button 8, the sub-control unit 160 subtracts 3 from the acquired number to change the number to 362 (see FIG. 88(B)). Then, when the start lever 9 is effectively operated and the push-order bell combination for paying out 15 coins is won, the sub-control unit 160 subtracts 1 from the remaining assist quantity to display 173, and adds 15 to the acquired quantity. 377. After that, the second special add-on game is executed in the same manner, and the button is pressed nine times to indicate that the add-on assist quantity is currently 32 (see FIG. 89(B)). In this manner, the sub-control section 160 repeats the special add-on game N times at the end of the symbol display game (main game).

In other words, the main control unit 100 starts a symbol display game in which three or more drum units 2 with 20 to 21 symbols arranged on the outer periphery are rotated, and draws at least a plurality of small winnings and replay winnings. Do (in the lottery of the role, it may be unsuccessful). When a stop button portion 10 provided corresponding to the drum portion 2 is operated, the corresponding reel drum is stopped, and winning occurs according to the display result of the pattern derived when all the reel drums are stopped. do. Also, it can be a failure. Note that the main control unit 100 may control the sub control unit 160 .

There are a plurality of types of small wins in the order of pushing, and there are a plurality of types of replay wins in the order of pushing in the replay combination. The order of operation of the stop button unit 10 corresponding to (small combination of pressing order and replay combination of pressing order) is notified. When the stop button unit 10 is operated in the order of operation, the main control unit 100 wins the winning combination. The sub-control unit 160 reduces the assist amount when the subtraction condition is established each time the symbol display game is completed, each time navigation is performed, or each time a small win in the order of pushing is won.

The sub-control unit 160 validates the operation of the operation switch (special button 14, max bet button 8, etc.) for performing a special add-on game (continuous hitting game), triggered by the establishment of the special add-on condition during the assist game. The sub control unit 160 determines the additional assist quantity for each operation of the operation switch in the special add-on game, accumulates and counts the determined add-on assist quantity, and terminates the special add-on game at the same operation timing. Decide whether or not When the special add-on game ends, the sub-control unit 160 adds the assist quantity existing (remaining) at the start of the special add-on game and the add-on assist quantity to obtain a new assist quantity, and obtains the determined special add-on for a plurality of times. Run the game repeatedly. When the special addition game is completed a plurality of times, the sub-control unit 160 advances the assist game to reduce the assist quantity, and if there is at least a new assist quantity, a stop switch corresponding to the pushing order. to notify the operation order of

FIG. 90 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the pressing order, showing that the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). The difference from FIG. 62 is that the name of the winning combination is changed to a generic name (also referred to as "generic information" or "group name"), and a new winning combination name is added. Similarly, FIG. 91 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the pressing order, and shows that the right 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). Differences from FIG. 63 are the same as those in FIG. It should be noted that since there are many parts in common with the contents explained with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, the overlapping contents will be omitted.

There are eight kinds of push order bell roles, push order bell 1a to push order bell 4b, which are collectively called push order bells (see FIGS. 90 and 91). That is, when the symbol display game is started, the main control unit 100 selects one of a plurality of roles (for example, strong cherry, weak cherry, second chance, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, bell in any order, etc.) by a symbol lottery. One combination (flag) is determined, and eight types (multiple types) of push order bells 1a to 4b exist in the plurality of combinations. The pushing order bell 1a shown in FIG. 90 is the pushing order role name (also referred to as "pushing order role name information"), and the role name is the pushing order bell. When the pressing order bell 1a is determined, a total of four types of small wins, that is, FR1 (specific minor win) with a payout number of 9 and FR2 to FR4 with a payout number of 1 each, can be won at the same time.

When the start lever 9 is operated in the symbol display game, the main control unit 100 performs a random number lottery. The first winning combination information (handling name) indicating that the determined winning combination is a small winning combination is transmitted. In other words, even if any one of the bell-in-push order wins during the normal game in the non-assisted state, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 that the winning combination is the bell-in-push order. However, information for recognizing (or discriminating, identifying, understanding, grasping, discriminating, and specifying) the order of operations for winning FR1 (specific minor winning combination) is not transmitted. For example, if the main control unit 100 transmits information indicating the pushing order bell 2a or pushing order bell 2b, which is the pushing order name in FIG. (Correspondence data between the name of the winning combination and the winning order of the specific minor combination. For example, the correspondence data between the name of the winning combination and the order of correct operation shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the ROM 161.) It recognizes that the winning operation order of FR1 is middle → right → left, which is stored in correspondence with the pressing order bell 2b, but in the non-assisted state, the pressing order bell 2a of the pressing order name is not transmitted, and the pressing order of the role name is not transmitted. Send only bells. However, although it is generally in a non-assisted state during the normal game, the notification condition (or the pushing order) is triggered by internally winning the push order bell role (for example, push order bell 2a) and activating the mission during the normal game. If the notification condition) is established, the pushing order bell 2a of the pushing order name may be transmitted.

On the other hand, the main control unit 100, during the special game in the assist state, when any one of the pressing order bell roles is won, the sub-control unit 160 sends the pressing order bell 2a (the determined role is the pressing order bell 2a). (Information for recognizing the order of winning, which is a small winning combination). When the sub control unit 160 receives the pressing order bell 2a (second combination information), it causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order. The main control unit 100 always wins a specific minor combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pressing order bell combination (for example, the middle right and left operation order of the pressing order bell 2a). On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the winning order, one of the other three small wins will be won or missed, but even if a win is made, the payout will be one, resulting in a game medal. decreases. The information to the effect that the determined winning combination is a smaller winning combination is information necessary for the sub-control section 160 to display the presentation image on the display presentation device 11 regardless of whether or not the player is in the assisted state.

That is, the main control unit 100 transmits the name of the winning combination to the sub-control unit 160 when the two conditions of the determination of the winning combination and the fulfillment of the notification condition are satisfied. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the name of the winning combination, it causes the display effect device 11 to display a navigation image (see FIG. 92) based on the middle, right, left operation order recognized from the name of the winning combination. Conversely, even if the sub-control unit 160 receives the role name, it cannot display the navigation image because the role name does not include information for recognizing the winning order. As a result, even if the sub-controller that controls the display of the navigation image is tampered with, it is not possible to display the order of operations for the winning combination, so it is possible to avoid fraudulent winning.

93 and 94 are flow charts showing the transmission processing procedure of winning combination information. The difference between FIGS. 93 and 94 is only that the processes in steps S1010 and S1015 are reversed, but the technical idea of the present invention includes both cases.

The main control unit 100 decides by itself whether or not to activate the assist function, and performs the hand information transmission process during the game main process of step S170 shown in FIG.

In step S1000, the main control unit 100 determines a winning combination by random number lottery, and proceeds to step S1010. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the combination is one of the eight kinds of bell combinations of the order of pushing and the notification condition is satisfied (see steps S1010 and S1015). If these two conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the winning combination name (second combination information) in step S1020. first winning combination information) to the sub-control unit 160. When the sub-controller 160 receives the name of the winning order, it causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order.

When the stop button section 10 is operated in step S1040, the main control section 100 stops the corresponding drum section 2, and in step S1050 all the reel drums (the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c) stop. When it does, the winning of the combination is determined according to the symbol display result derived in step S1060, and the payout processing of medals according to the small winning combination is executed in step S1070. Note that the main control unit 100 always wins a specific minor combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pressing order bell combination (for example, the middle right and left operation order of the pressing order bell 2a).

FIG. 95 is a configuration diagram of the small winning combination in the pressing order, and shows that the middle 1st is the correct operation procedure (winning order). The difference from FIG. 90 is that the name of the pushing order has been deleted. Similarly, FIG. 96 is a configuration diagram of a small combination in order of pushing, showing that the right 1st is the correct operation procedure. Differences from FIG. 91 are the same as those in FIG. 62, 63, 90, and 91 have many parts in common, so the duplicated contents are omitted from the description.

When the start lever 9 is operated in the symbol display game, the main control unit 100 performs a random number lottery. The first winning combination information (handling name) indicating that the determined winning combination is a small winning combination is transmitted. In other words, even if any one of the bell-in-push order wins during the normal game in the non-assisted state, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 that the winning combination is the bell-in-push order. However, the order information for recognizing (or discriminating, identifying, understanding, grasping, discriminating, and specifying) the order of operations for winning FR1 (specific minor winning combination) is not transmitted.

On the other hand, the main control unit 100, when any one of the push-order bell roles is won during the special game in the assist state, tells the sub-control unit 160 that the winning role is the push-order bell role, FR1 (specific small Second winning combination information added with order information for recognizing the operation sequence for winning a winning combination is notified. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the pressing order bell combination and order information (second combination information), it causes the display effect device 11 to display the operation order of the stop switches corresponding to the recognized winning order (see FIG. 92). . The main control unit 100 always wins a specific minor combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pressing order bell combination (for example, the middle right and left operation order of the pressing order bell 2a). However, if the stop switch is not operated in the winning order, one of the other three small wins will be won or missed. decreases. The information to the effect that the determined winning combination is a smaller winning combination is information necessary for the sub-control section 160 to display the presentation image on the display presentation device 11 regardless of whether or not the player is in the assisted state. Since the sub control unit 160 receives order information corresponding to the pressing order bell combination from the main control unit 100 , there is a unique effect that it is not necessary to store the pressing order data in the ROM 161 .

FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing a transmission processing procedure of winning combination information.

The main control unit 100 decides by itself whether or not to activate the assist function, and performs the hand information transmission process during the game main process of step S170 shown in FIG.

In step S1200, the main control unit 100 determines a winning combination by random number lottery, and proceeds to step S1210. The main control unit 100 determines whether or not the combination is one of the eight kinds of bell combinations of the pressing order and the notification condition is satisfied (see steps S1210 and S1215). If these two conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 100 notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the pressing order bell information and order information (second winning combination information) of the winning combination in step S1220. notifies the sub-control unit 160 of the pressing order bell information (first winning combination information) of the winning combination in step S1230. When receiving the pressing order bell information and the order information, the sub control section 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display the order of operation of the stop switches corresponding to the winning order recognized from the order information.

When the stop button section 10 is operated in step S1240, the main control section 100 stops the corresponding drum section 2, and in step S1250 all reel drums (left drum 2a, middle drum 2b and right drum 2c) stop. When it does, the winning of the combination is determined according to the symbol display result derived in step S1260, and the payout processing of medals according to the small winning combination is executed in step S1270. Note that the main control unit 100 always wins a specific minor combination when the stop switch is operated in the winning order of the internally won pressing order bell combination (for example, the middle right and left operation order of the pressing order bell 2a).

Figure 98 is a front view of a sanding device.

The sand device 300 is generally installed on either the right side or the left side of the game machine main body 1 (the reel-type game machine main body 1) one-to-one so as to be capable of two-way communication with the credit control unit 165. , connected by a wire harness. The credit control unit 165, like the main control unit 100 and the sub-control unit 160, is an integrated one-chip microcomputer equipped with a microprocessor with a built-in CPU. Manages credit information and player-specific information (address, name, age, personal identification number, telephone number, etc.).

Reference numeral 310 denotes a bill inserting portion, which can currently insert only 1,000 yen bills, 5,000 yen bills, and 10,000 yen bills. For example, when 10,000 yen in cash is inserted, the data display unit 320 displays 100 as the corresponding frequency. Reference numeral 330 denotes an operation unit for switching between a mode using cash and a mode using cards inserted in the card insertion unit 340 . The operation unit 330 also includes a 10-key 331 and the like for inputting a personal identification number when a membership card is inserted. This membership card stores accumulated cash information that has not been used in a game, accumulated credit information (accumulated medal information) as game value information, and player management information. By inserting the membership card into the settlement device, the cash corresponding to the stored cash information can be settled. In addition, it is possible not only to exchange the accumulated credit information for prizes corresponding to the stored credit information, but also to reuse the tokens as stored medals to play a pachi-slot game. Naturally, it is also possible to record the stored ball information and play a pachinko game.

FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the settlement processing procedure.

When the settlement button 6 is operated while the game is on standby (see steps S130 to S160 shown in FIG. 22), the main control unit 100 calls this subroutine and confirms the game mode in step S1300. This game mode is set to either a normal game mode using the current game medals or a credit mode using the sand device 300 by operating the game mode selection switch in advance by the hall side. The main control unit 100 checks the game mode selection switch when the power is turned on, and determines whether or not to set the game mode flag. For example, the game mode flag is 0 in the normal game mode, and the game mode flag is 1 in the credit mode. The main control unit 100 checks the game mode flag in step S1310, and if it is 0, it determines that it is the normal game mode, and if it is 1, it determines that it is the credit mode.

The main control unit 100 performs credit settlement processing in step S1320 in the credit mode, and performs game medium payout processing in step S1330 in the normal game mode. The credit settlement process is to send the credit control unit 165 a settlement process command and credit information currently inserted (the number of medals, the number of pachinko balls, etc.). In the game medium payout process, the main control unit 100 itself calculates the sum of the inserted number (the number displayed by the inserted number LED 4a) and the accumulated medal number (the number displayed by the accumulated medal number display LED 4b). This is the process of paying out from the medal hopper 18). However, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the replay combination has won in step S1340, and if the replay combination has won, the number of insertions indicated by the number of insertion LED 4a cannot be paid out. Therefore, only the number of stored medals is paid out, and a warning notification command is transmitted to the sub-controller 160 in step S1350. When the sub-control unit 160 receives the payout warning notification command at the time of winning the replay combination, the sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display a warning message to the effect that "Replay wins. Please play the game." 12, a warning tone or a similar warning comment of "Replay wins. Please play the game."

When the credit control unit 165 receives the settlement processing command and the currently entered credit information (0 to 3 data), the credit control unit 165 adds up the stored credits (0 to 99 data) displayed by the stored credit display unit. For example, if the credit information is 3 and the stored credit is 35, the total value is 38. The credit control unit 165 transmits the return command and the total credit value to the sand device 300 .

When the sandwich machine 300 receives the game value data corresponding to a total of 35 credits from the credit control unit 165, it stores the balance information of the inserted cash and the game value data in the internal member card, visitor information recording medium, or the like. The added value is recorded and discharged from the card insertion portion 340 to the outside of the sand device. For example, if the cash balance displayed by the sandwich device 300 is 8,000 yen, the cash balance of the membership card is 3,000 yen, and 1,210 medals (credits) are recorded, the new cash balance is 11,000 yen, and the new cash balance is 11,000 yen. The number of stored medals is recorded as 1248 and discharged out of the sand device.

FIG. 100 is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine.

The difference from FIG. 5 is that only electronic data credits are used for the pachislot game, and no game medals (or game media such as pachinko balls) are used, so the medal detection sensor 130 and the medal payout device 18 are eliminated. That is the point. In addition, the medal sorting device, the medal slot 5, the receiving tray 15, the medal passage, and the like are not required as mechanical components. Therefore, the game mode selection switch explained in FIG. 99 is not provided either. Also, instead of the settlement button 190, a return button, which will be described later, is provided. When the return button is operated, a return signal (return pulse) is input from the credit control unit 165 to the main control unit 100. The credit display section corresponds to the stored medal number display LED 4b, and the credit control section 165 performs display control.

FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram of a display unit and an operation unit.

FIG. 101(A) shows a cash point display section 321 and a credit point display section 322 included in the data display section 320 of the sand device 300, and a return button 332, a switch button 333 and a payout button 334 included in the operation section 330. showing. The cash frequency display unit 321 is composed of three 7-segment displays, and the credit frequency display unit 322 is composed of five units. When a 10,000 yen bill is inserted into the bill insertion portion 310 of FIG. 98, the cash frequency display portion 321 displays 100. That is, one degree corresponds to 100 yen. When the return button 332 included in the operation unit 330 is operated in this state, the visitor card with 100 points recorded as the balance information is returned from the card insertion unit 340 . When this visitor card is inserted into the card insertion portion 340 again, the same state is established and a game with 100 points becomes possible. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101(D), the 7-segment display is turned on when it is blacked out, and turned off when it is white.

When the membership card is inserted into the card insertion portion 340, the input of the 4-digit personal identification number is required. 321. When the switch button 333 is operated once in this state, the remaining credit information recorded in the membership card is displayed on the credit point display section 322 . By repeating the operation of the switch button 332 again, the display of the balance information and the remaining credit information is alternately switched for each operation. For example, assuming that the balance information recorded on the membership card is 6000 yen, a 1000 yen bill can be inserted into the bill insertion portion 310 and the balance information is updated to 7000 yen. On the other hand, when the balance information is 6000 yen, additional 5000 yen bills and 10,000 yen bills cannot be inserted. The reason for this is that the upper limit of the balance information that can be recorded in the membership card is 10,000 yen (predetermined amount), and the total amount exceeds the predetermined amount. Similarly, when 10,000 yen in cash is inserted into the banknote insertion unit 310 and the balance is 6,000 yen, a membership card with recorded balance information of 4,000 yen or less can be inserted, but a membership card with balance information of more than 4,000 yen can be inserted. cannot be inserted.

In other words, when cash is inserted into the banknote insertion portion 310 with a member card inserted, the sandwiching device 300 determines the type of banknote (1000 yen banknote, 5000 yen banknote, or 10,000 yen banknote). to recognize If the sum of the balance information recorded in the member card and the recognized cash is 10,000 yen (predetermined amount) or less, cash is accepted and the total amount is displayed on the cash frequency display unit 321, but cash is accepted. If not, the cash is ejected from the banknote insertion portion 310 . Conversely, when the membership card is inserted into the card insertion part 340 with cash in it, the sand device 300 recognizes the balance information recorded in the membership card. If the sum of the cash balance and the balance information of the recognized membership card is 10,000 yen (predetermined amount) or less, the membership card is accepted and the total amount is displayed on the cash frequency display unit 321, but the membership card is not accepted. In that case, the cash is ejected from the card insertion portion 340 .

FIG. 101B is a schematic diagram of the credit display section.

A credit display portion 169 corresponds to the conventional accumulated medal number display LED 4 b and is arranged in the display LED block 4 . Similar to the credit point display section 322 of the sand device 300, it is composed of five 7-segment displays, and can display the credit points from 0 to 99,999. However, since the credit points are stored even if the points are exceeded, it is possible to play games or exchange them for prizes. The card balance display section 50 is composed of three 7-segment displays, and is provided in the place where the medal insertion section 5 was arranged. The card balance display unit displays the inserted cash as balance information (100 yen is one unit) in the same manner as the cash frequency display unit 321 . For example, when a 10,000 yen note is inserted into the bill insertion section 310 (see FIG. 98), the card balance display section 50 displays 100, and when the lending button 51 is operated, 90 is displayed by subtracting 10 points corresponding to 1000 yen. , and the credit point display unit 322 displays 50. That is, one credit corresponds to 0.2 points and 20 yen in cash. When the return button 52 (corresponding to the conventional settlement button 6) is operated here, the visitor card on which the cash balance of 90 degrees (cash information of 9000 yen) and the credit balance (savings credit) 50 are recorded is returned from the card insertion portion 340. be. Even if the return button 332 is operated, the visitor card on which the same information is recorded is returned.

102 to 105 are schematic diagrams of the display unit.

When the player inserts the membership card into the card insertion part 340 of the sandwich device 300, the input of the 4-digit personal identification number is required. The balance information is displayed on the cash frequency display section 321 (see FIG. 102(A)). It is assumed that the membership card records 8000 yen as balance information and 12345 as balance credit information (corresponding to the current 12345 medals).

The sandwich device 300 reads the balance information and displays 80 on the cash value display unit 321, while displaying ----- (five bars) on the credit value display unit 322, and also displays the cash mode command and the balance information. to send. When the credit control unit 165 receives the cash mode command and balance information from the sandwich device 300 , the credit control unit 165 recognizes that it is a mode using cash and the balance is 80 degrees, and displays 80 on the card balance display unit 50 . When the player operates the payout button 334 in this state, the sand device 300 transmits a payout command to the credit control unit 165 . After authentication (confirmation of normality or no abnormality) through mutual communication, the sandwich device 300 displays 70 on the cash value display unit 321, and the credit control unit 165 displays 50 on the credit display unit 169. The cash count of 70 is displayed on the balance display unit 50 (see FIG. 102(B)). Similarly, when the player operates the lending button 51 in the state of FIG. Authentication is then performed through mutual communication, and the same display as in FIG. 102(B) is performed.

When the player operates the switching button 333 in the state of FIG. 3 bars) and send a credit mode command. When the credit control unit 165 receives the credit mode command from the sandwich device 300, the credit display unit 169 remains 0, and the card balance display unit 50 displays Crt (abbreviation of Credit), which means a mode in which credit is used. (See FIG. 103(A)). When the player operates the payout button 334 or the lending button 51 in this state, the player is authenticated by mutual communication (communication including transmission and reception of the payout command or the lending command), and the minimum unit of payout credit, 50, is displayed on the credit display. 169. The credit point display section 322 displays 12295, which is the value obtained by subtracting 50 from 12345 (see FIG. 103(B)). In other words, with one payout operation or lending operation, the sandwich device 300 always pays out 50 credit points to the credit control unit 165 . However, if the credit display unit 169 displays even one credit, the credit may not be paid out even if the payout operation or the lending operation is performed. That is, only when the credit display unit 169 is displaying 0 credits, 50 credit points, which is the minimum unit, is paid out.

102(B) or 103(B), the credit control unit 165 changes the state in which data 00 is input to the data input circuit 166 to the state in which data 11 indicating the number of credits of 3 or more is input. do. When the max bet button 8 is operated in this state (three LEDs 4a are turned off and the bet amount is not set), the main control unit 100 turns on three LEDs 4a and only 3 credits. It outputs to the credit control unit 165 input data indicating that the bet amount has been input. The credit control unit 165 causes the credit display unit 169 (stored credit display unit) to display 47, which is the value obtained by subtracting the credit 3 (see FIGS. 104A and 104B). In this state, when the player operates the return button 52 (credit return switch) or the return button 332, the credit control unit 165 receives the signal from the return button sensor 168 and sends the return signal to the data input circuit 166 by one pulse. input. When the return button 52 is operated and a return signal is received from the data input circuit 166, the main control unit 100 sets a predetermined number of three bets for one game, and the game can be started. , to the credit control unit 165, the bet amount data indicating the bet amount of 3.

When the credit control unit 165 receives the number-of-bets data, the credit control unit 165 transmits return credit information (game value) that the return credit is 50 (a value obtained by calculating 47+3) to the sand device 300 . The data indicating 47 and the data indicating 3 may be transmitted as they are. The sand device 300 adds 50 of the return credit to the membership card or the like, records the cash balance level and the credit balance level, and discharges it. In the case of FIG. 104(A), a cash balance of 70 points and a credit balance of 12395 (a value obtained by calculating 12345+50) are recorded on the ejected membership card or the like. In the case of FIG. 104(B), the ejected membership card or the like records a cash balance of 80 points and a credit balance of 12345 (a value obtained by calculating 12295+50) (that is, exactly the same as the originally recorded information). Yes, equal to unchanged). FIG. 105 shows the display state after the member card or the like is ejected. The cash value display portion 321, the credit value display portion 322, and the card balance display portion 50 all display "-", and the credit display portion 169 displays " 0” is displayed, all three of the input number LEDs 4a are turned off. When the player operates the return button 52 in a state where the replay combination (replay combination) has won and the next game can be executed, the main control unit 100 transmits bet amount data indicating a bet amount of 0. Then, the credit control unit 165 transmits the return credit information (game value) that the return credit is 47 to the sand device 300 . The sand device 300 adds 47 of the return credit to the membership card or the like, records the cash balance level and the credit balance level, and discharges it. The main control unit 100 outputs a warning command to the sub-control unit 160 because the game can be played again. The sub-control unit 160 causes the display effect device 11 to display a warning screen and generates a warning sound from the speaker unit 12 to inform the player that the game can be played again.

As another embodiment, when the player operates the return button 52 or the return button 332 in the state of FIG. 104(A), the state of FIG. , the state shown in FIG. 105 may be obtained by the second operation. Similarly, when the player operates the return button 52 or the return button 332 in the state of FIG. 104(B), the state of FIG. The state shown in FIG. 105 may be obtained by the second operation. That is, when the credit control unit 165 receives information that the return bet amount is 0 from the main control unit 100 by operating any of the return buttons, the credit control unit 165 records the cash balance level and the credit balance level in the member card or the like in the sandwich device 300. to discharge.

FIG. 116 is a block diagram of the control circuit system of the reel-type gaming machine. FIG. 117 shows a list of main board commands, and FIG. 118 shows a list of medal number board commands. This invention is a further improvement of FIG. 100, and the description of the same functions will be cited, and only the differences will be mainly described.

As already explained, the difference from FIG. The major difference is that the medal payout device 18 is eliminated. In addition, the medal sorting device, the medal slot 5, the receiving tray 15, the medal passage, and the like are not required as mechanical components. When the count button is pressed, the number of medals managed by the credit control unit 165 (or also called the medal number management control unit 165) is subtracted, and a count notification is sent to the sandwich device 300. The credit display section corresponds to the stored medal number display LED 4b, and the credit control section 165 performs display control.

As shown in FIG. 100, a settlement button 190 is provided, and when this button is operated with game medals inserted, the inserted number returns to 0 and the inserted number is added to the credits. On the other hand, the external centralized terminal board 170 is removed, and various signals and data output from the external centralized terminal board 170 are output from the main control section 100 to the sanding device 300 via the credit control section 165, and are sandwiched. Various data necessary for management are output to the hall computer from a dedicated unit built in the apparatus 300 . Data communication between the main control unit 100 and the credit control unit 165 is connected by two serial data buses, and various signals required for managing the number of medals are transmitted and received. The communication signals between the medalless game machine and the dedicated unit are specified in the connection specifications prescribed by the industry.

The main board commands transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the credit control unit 165 include a plurality of game state commands (identification data FFH to FBH) corresponding to the game state of the game machine, and a game point control unit at each predetermined interrupt cycle. There are constant commands (identification data A0H to CEH) to be sent, both of which are 2 bytes. For example, the plurality of game state commands include a lever pressing command when the start lever is operated, a all reel stop command when all reels are stopped, an input request command when the input button is operated, a settlement request command when the settlement button is operated, There is a payout request command for payout processing after all reels have stopped. The regular command is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the credit control unit 165 at each predetermined interrupt cycle (interrupt cycle of 1.49 ms). The information contained in this constant command includes, for example, the chip ID of the gaming machine main body, identification code, manufacturer code, product code, total number of input, MY information, total number of bonuses paid out, total number of consecutive bonuses paid out, bonus ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructed accessory ratio, accessory state ratio, number of games played, main control state 1 and main control state 2, game machine error state, game machine fraud signal 1, and game machine fraud There is a signal 2 and the credit control unit 165 is sending this information to the sand device 300 . Furthermore, the sand device 300 transmits information to the hall computer so that the hall computer uses it for information recognition and management of the game machine.

The medal number board command transmitted from the credit control unit 165 to the main control unit 100 is 5-byte information, the first byte being identification data, and the second byte being the number of game medals (data value is 1: game 1 medal, 2: 2 game medals, 3: 3 to 14,999 game medals, 4: 15,000 to 16,368 game medals, 5: 16,369 or more game medals), 3rd The byte indicates the medal count control state, the fourth byte indicates the lower game medal count, and the fifth byte indicates the higher game medal count. As for the medal count control status of the 3rd byte, bit 0 means a response that cannot be inserted (only a response to a request to insert), bit 2 means a VL error (unit communication error), bit 4 means a payout overflow, and bit 5 means a waiting state for VL recovery. is a flag to Bit 1, bit 3, bit 6, and bit 7 are not used, but will be used in the future. For example, if a request is made to throw in three tokens, the number of medals changes before the request is transmitted, and the value of the throw-in failure response becomes 1 when the request cannot be met.

If the identification data of the first byte is FFH, it is a lever depression response, FEH is a full reel stop response, FDH is an input request response, FCH is a balance request response, FBH is a payout request response, FAH means a constant command response, F9H means a lending notification, F8H means a count short push notification, F7H means a count long push notification, and F6H means an abnormal command reception response. That is, the five pieces of identification data function as ACK signals for the lever depression command, all reel stop command, insertion request command, settlement request command, and payout request command from the main control unit 100 . The abnormal command reception response is a response to when the input is not possible, when invalid identification data is received, and when the settlement or payout request sequence is abnormal.

Information about the game points currently stored includes the number of game medals in the second byte, or the lower number of game medals in the fourth byte and the upper number of game medals in the fifth byte. The number of game medals is 1, the number of game medals is 2, the number of game medals is 3 to 14999, the number of game medals is 15000 to 16368, and the number of game medals. Any one of 16369 or more states is recognized. The lower game medal count and the upper game medal count take into account the case where the sub-controller 160 displays the medal count on the liquid crystal, and the data is sent to the sub-controller 160 as it is.

The main control unit 100, according to the number of game medals data, 1: the number of game medals is 1, so 1 can be inserted, 2: the number of game medals is 2, so 2 or less can be inserted, 3: game Since the number of medals is 3 to 14999, it recognizes the state in which it is possible to insert 3 or less medals. Further, 4: the number of game medals is 15000 to 16368, and 5: when the number of game medals is 16369 or more, "counting signal output" of the test signal is performed.

The credit control unit 165 monitors the state of the sandwich device 300 and determines whether or not there is a VL abnormality (unit communication abnormality) in the I/F signal shared power supply. is set to 1 and transmitted to the main control unit 100 . The payout overflow is an error generated by the credit control unit 165 itself when the number of game medals after the payout process reaches 16369 or more. Waiting for VL recovery is a flag indicating that VLON has not been detected even once after the power is turned on, and the flag corresponding to each state is set to 1. The credit control unit 165 sets the payout overflow flag of bit 4 to 1 or the VL recovery wait flag of bit 5 to 1 according to the state, and transmits the flag to the main control unit 100 . When a hall clerk turns on the power of an island where a pachislot machine is installed, if the reel type game machine main body 1 (pachislot main body 1) starts up before the sand machine 300 starts up, the sand machine 300 and the machine machine body 1 start up first. Even if the connection is correct, VL abnormality (VL error) occurs. That is, even if there is a VL abnormality (VL error), if VLON is not detected even once, the main control unit 100 detects a VL error and displays that effect, but the sub control unit 160 displays this information. No audible warning or lamp warning display (or error display sparingly). If this function and specification were not provided, it is expected that an error sound would continue to be heard in the hall, so the novelty and inventive step of the invention (technical idea) should be affirmed.

The main control unit 100 and the credit control unit 165 (medal number board) are arranged on one main board, constitute two functional blocks, and separate CPUs are arranged respectively. Exchanges between the main control unit 100 and the credit control unit 165 are performed by serial communication of transmission and reception. The credit control unit 165 (medal count board) is configured to communicate with an external device called a dedicated unit through serial communication. The role of the credit control unit 165 (medal count control board) is to manage credits (stored) and communicate with an external device called a dedicated unit, and it constantly checks whether this communication is being performed normally. (Communication normal state/Communication abnormal state).

As a rough flow of the game, in the state where the main board can be inserted, the main control unit 100 inquires the medal count board about credits, and the medal count board responds to the medal count inquiry to the main board. (eg, there are nn credits). If the number of credits exceeds the required minimum number, the main board activates the BET button and requests the medal count board to insert the line. reply. At this time, credits are reduced by the number of lines inserted on the medal number board. If the main board receives a normal reception response from the medal number board, it reflects the line input, and if the specified number or more is input, the start lever is activated. It should be noted that the process from pressing the start lever to spinning and stopping the reel on the main board is the same as the conventional one, and is completed on the main board. Then, if the main circuit board has won a prize when all reels are stopped, a payout request is transmitted to the medal count circuit board, and the medal count circuit board processes the payout request from the main circuit board and returns normal reception to the main circuit board. . At this time, processing is performed to increase credits by the number of payouts on the medal count board. This is the technical idea implemented at the development stage, and the applicant believes that it is patentable (this is the original invention of undisclosed technology (Invention 1)).

As a second aspect of the present invention, the main board and the medal number board are constantly monitored to check whether they are normally exchanged. The features will be described below with reference to the main board command list in FIG. 117 and the medal number board command list in FIG.

The game state command is 2-byte data, the first byte being identification data and the second byte being content data. The gaming state commands include a lever pressing command when the start lever is activated with identification data FFH (the number of medals inserted (1 to 3)), and a command to stop all reels when all reels are stopped with identification data FEH (the number of payouts ( 0 to 15)), the input request command when the input button whose identification data is FDH is operated (requested number of sheets to be input (1 to 3)), the settlement request command when the settlement button whose identification data is FCH is operated (requested number of sheets (1 3)), and a payout request command (payout requested number of sheets (1 to 15)) at the time of payout processing after stopping all reels with identification data FBH.

In the constant monitoring described above, the main control unit 100 sends an inquiry request command (or constant command) to the medal number board every 100 ms of the interrupt timing, and manages the number of credits based on the response information. The inquiry request command shown in FIG. 117 includes the chip ID (first byte) of identification data A0H, the chip ID (second byte) of identification data A1H, the chip ID (third byte) of identification data A3H, . 2, the main control state 1 of the identification data CDH, and the main control state 2 of the identification data CEH for 47 types. The main control unit 100 transmits the chip ID (1st byte) in order every 100 ms of the interrupt timing, and when it reaches the final gaming machine fraud signal 2, it again turns around to the first chip ID (1st byte). sending repeatedly. If an operation such as pressing a lever is performed while inquiry request commands are being sequentially transmitted, the transmission of the lever pressing command is reserved and transmitted when the next interrupt occurs.

Each time the credit control unit 165 receives any one of the 27 request commands, the credit control unit 165 transmits a constant command response of the identification data FAH to the main control unit 100, and determines the number of game medals (data value is 1: game medal number 1, 2: number of game medals 2, 3: number of game medals 3 to 14,999, 4: number of game medals 15,000 to 16,368, 5: number of game medals 16,369 or more), 3rd byte indicates the medal count control state, the fourth byte indicates the lower game medal count, and the fifth byte indicates the higher game medal count. Information on whether or not communication with the sand device 300 is normal is included in the medal number control state, and is transmitted at every 100 ms of the interrupt timing.

The number of medals board processes payouts (adding medals to credits) when payout requests (1 to 15) are received from the main board. If a payout request is sent illegally, credits may be added infinitely.

As a countermeasure against goto, an upper limit is set for the number of coins to be paid out at one time, and a payout request exceeding 15 is invalidated (ignored) (countermeasure 1). Information is sent from the main board to the medal count board at all timings from pressing the start lever to stopping all reels, and the state of the game machine is simply monitored on the medal count board. When the gaming machine is in a state other than the timing when all reels are stopped, even if a payout request comes, it is ignored (countermeasure 2). In addition to measure 2, once a payout request is accepted, the payout request is ignored unless the next command from the start lever depression to all reel stop command comes correctly (measure 3). In addition, although invalid payout requests are currently ignored, it is also possible to issue an error notification. In particular, even if a communication error occurs between the medal count board and the dedicated unit, it is included in the response to the medal inquiry request.

This time, when the checkout button is operated, the medals inserted in the line are returned to the credit, but as with the withdrawal request, there is a possibility that it will be a bogus, so the following countermeasures are being taken. An upper limit is set for the number of bills to be settled at one time, and billing requests exceeding three bills are ignored (countermeasure 1). By transmitting information from the board to the medal number board at the timing of pressing the start lever and stopping all reels, the state of the game machine is simply monitored on the medal number board. Then, when the state of the game machine is the timing when all reels are stopped and the state other than the state in which the input request is being processed, even if the settlement request comes, it is ignored (countermeasure 2). In addition to measure 2, once a settlement request is accepted, the settlement request is ignored until the input request is processed again (measure 3).

Errors are explained below. A communication error (details of error content) will occur in the following cases after the input, settlement, and payout request commands have been sent. (1) When an abnormal response command (a value different from the transmission command or a reception error) is received 10 times, (2) When the command cannot be received for 300 ms after transmission for 10 consecutive times.

The main board and medal number board communication error (details of error details) will occur when the "medal number inquiry request" command is sent 100 times and the "medal number inquiry response" command is not received even once. . (1) When the interrupt cycle counter is "11" on the main board, a "medal number inquiry request" command is sent to the medal number board, and 1 is added to the upper limit number of transmissions. Generate an error when the upper limit number of transmissions reaches "100". (2) When the main board receives a "medal count inquiry response" command from the medal count board, the upper limit number of transmissions is set to zero. As error cancellation details, when the main board receives a "medal number inquiry response" command from the medal number board, the error is cleared.

As a dedicated unit communication error (error content details), an error occurs when the VL signal is off for 100 ms. The medal number board determines whether or not the VL signal is ON every 1 ms. If it is OFF, 1 is added to the VL abnormality timer, and if it is ON, the VL abnormality timer is set to 0. When the VL anomaly timer reaches 100, error information is added when sending the "medal count inquiry response" command. When the main board receives the "medal count inquiry response" command from the medal count board, and if dedicated unit communication error information is added, an error is notified. As the error cancellation details, if the VL abnormality timer is other than 100, a non-error state is given when the "medal count inquiry response" command is sent. When the main board receives the "medal number inquiry response" command from the medal number board, and the dedicated unit communication error information is not given, the error is cleared.

FIG. 106 is a drum pattern layout table. The symbol combination display determination diagram is similar to that of FIG.

On each of the left drum 2a, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, a loop band (not shown) on which a left drum pattern, a middle drum pattern and a right drum pattern are drawn is arranged so as to go around the outer circumference of each drum. affixed to.

Twenty-one different patterns are drawn on each belt, and the pattern "Blue 7, Blue 7" that activates the big bonus role (one type of role continuous operation device, hereinafter referred to as "RBB") , Blue 7", "Black bar, Red bar, Blue 7" with a pattern that activates regular bonus role 1 (type 1 role, hereinafter referred to as "RB 1"), Regular bonus role 2 (type 1 role, hereinafter referred to as ``RB2'') is activated by the symbols ``black bar, red bar, red bar'', and the symbols ``white 7'', ``black bar'', and ``upper chili'' that make up various small winnings and various replay winnings, Patterns such as "lower chili", "bell", "cherry", "watermelon", and "replay" are arranged.

FIG. 107 is a payout table and game state transition diagram. FIG. 107A is a payout table when the accessory is not activated and when the BB general game is played (the prescribed number is 3), but the same prescribed number is used when the accessory is activated.

When all the three drums are stopped, the main control unit 100 performs combination display determination of winning or operation-related symbols on the effective line (see FIG. 51) according to the number of inserted game medals. In this case, the number of inserted cards is 3, and the effective line is only one horizontal line at the center.

(1) Big bonus combination (RBB: continuous actuating device related to the first special role): Blue 7 on the left drum 2a, Blue 7 on the middle drum 2b, and Blue 7 on the right drum 2c stop on the effective line. This is the name of the role in the case where the winning number is 0, and after that, a big bonus game (RBB game) is provided. There is only one type of combination pattern of the bonus combination, and even if the internal winning is done independently, the predetermined bonus combination pattern does not stop on the effective line unless the stop operation timing of the stop button part 10 is matched, so that the next game and thereafter. will be carried over to

This RBB game ends when the payout number (acquired number) exceeds 50, the number of inserted coins is 3, and the probability of winning a small combination is the same as in the normal game. Also, since the number of inserted coins is 3 and the expected value of the number of payouts per game is less than 3 (for example, about 2), when the RBB game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease in calculation (in other words, The expected value for increasing medals in one RBB game is negative). In other words, the RBB game is in a disadvantageous playing state for the player. Incidentally, since the BB to be reduced has been fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents of that explanation are used. However, the big bonus game is digested by the big bonus general game and the regular bonus internal medium game in which the regular bonus role is internally won in the big bonus general game, and in both sections, by winning all the pushing order small roles, increases. On the other hand, the regular bonus game state, which is shifted by the SRB symbols being activated together, basically does not occur (penalty state). In other words, in the regular bonus game state, the winning areas of the three types of small bell wins overlap each other, and 2/3 of the winning areas of the small bell win, which were originally dispersed, become non-wins (or single win winning areas). As a matter of course, if the big bonus game is averaged, the number of payouts will decrease.

In particular, when a pressing-order small combination is won in the big bonus general game, target small combinations (for example, three types of bell 1 to bell 3) are won when the stop switch is operated in the winning operation mode. In other words, if the operation order is wrong, the target small winning combination will be missed, and the number of winnings will be 0 due to missing a one-coin winning combination with less than 3 inserted coins. On the other hand, when the pressing order minor combination is won in the regular bonus internal game, the main control unit 100 stops to win the target minor combination regardless of the operation mode (order) of the stop switch, regardless of how it is operated. Change control.

In the normal game state (RT0 state: replay winning probability is about 1/7.3 of the predetermined value), if the bonus combination (RBB) is internally won (conditional device activated) and carried over, replay is not possible at least from the next game onwards. The probability of winning fluctuates to enter a high-probability replay state (RT1 state: replay probability of about 1/5.5). When this bonus combination pattern is displayed (winning) and the RBB game by the activation of the bonus combination is completed (completion of operation), the replay winning probability changes and returns to the initial state (RT0 state). That is, the player will play the variable display game in any one of the RT0 state, RT1 state, and RBB game state (RBB general game state or SRB game state). Even if RBB is internally elected, the RT0 state may be maintained.

(2) 1st regular bonus hand (disadvantageous shift RB1: first class special hand): Name of hand when watermelon on left drum 2a, cherry on middle drum 2b, and red bar on right drum 2c stop on the effective line. , the number of acquired coins is 0, and then a regular bonus game (RB game) is provided. There is only one type of combination pattern for the bonus combination, and even if a single internal winning is made, the predetermined bonus combination pattern does not stop on the effective line unless the timing of the stop operation of the stop button part 10 is matched, so that the next game is played. It will be carried over later. This RB1 game is designed to end after winning 8 games or completing 12 games. ), so when the RB1 game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease in calculation (in other words, the expected value of increasing the number of medals in one RB1 game is negative). In other words, the RB1 game is in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. One condition for ending the RB1 game is that 12 games have been completed, and if 12 games are played, 24 cards (-2 cards×12 games) will be reduced. Since the BB to be reduced has been fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents thereof are used. Further, during the disadvantageous shift RB1, the shift RB is randomly selected and the winning RB is carried over, so that the shift RB can be internally won after the shift RB1 ends. For example, during shift RB1, the winning probability in one game is 2/3, and only shift RB1 can be won. On the other hand, if the winning ratio of shift RB1 to shift RB2 (to be described later) is about 10:1, the player dares to challenge and aim to win a prize of shift RB2. Also, during shift RB2, the probability of winning in one game is 1/3, and only shift RB2 can be won. The winning probability of shift RB1 is 2/3, and the winning probability of shift RB2 is 1/3, which is the same as the winning probability of RB1 and RB2 in the big bonus general game.

(3) 2nd regular bonus hand (advantageous shift RB2: first class special hand): Name of hand when watermelon on left drum 2a, red bar on middle drum 2b, and cherry on right drum 2c stop on the effective line. , the number of acquired coins is 0, and then a regular bonus game (RB game) is provided. There is only one type of combination pattern for the bonus combination, and even if a single internal winning is made, the predetermined bonus combination pattern does not stop on the effective line unless the timing of the stop operation of the stop button part 10 is matched, so that the next game is played. It will be carried over later. This RB2 game is designed to end after winning 8 games or completing 12 games. ), so when the RB2 game ends, the number of medals will almost certainly decrease in calculation (in other words, the expected value of increasing the number of medals in one RB1 game is negative). In other words, the RB2 game is in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. One end condition of the RB2 game is that 12 games have been completed, and if 12 games are played, 24 cards (-2 cards×12 games) will be reduced. Since the BB to be reduced has been fully explained in FIGS. 53 to 58, the contents thereof are used. In addition, during the shift RB2, which is advantageous, a lottery is drawn for the shift RB and the winning RB is carried over, so that the shift RB2 can be internally won after the shift RB2 ends. For example, during shift RB2, only shift RB2 can be won, and if the winning ratio of shift RB1 to shift RB2 (to be described later) is about 1:1, it will be a penalty for the player and he will not operate desperately. It's like, so it's more interesting.

(4) 1st small win (FR1: 1st target small win): The name of the win when the bell symbol on the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the right drum 2c are aligned on the effective line and stopped. There is, and the number of acquisition (number of payouts) is 9. When the first minor winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the FR1 (fruit 1) conditional device is activated. The symbols are arranged so that the bell symbols stop on the active line and the player wins without fail (the bell symbols are displayed horizontally in the center). The first minor combination is, in most cases, simultaneously won with a one-piece minor combination (inhibition minor combination) for pressing order control in the RT0 state or RT1 state. The first target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the first target minor combination is notified. In addition, it is one of the normal small roles.

(5) Second Small Win (FR2: Second Target Small Win): When the second small win wins, the bell pattern on the upper left drum 2a, the middle bell pattern on the middle drum 2b, and the lower bell pattern on the right drum 2c are aligned. is stopped and displayed, and the number of acquired cards (the number of cards to be paid out) is nine. However, on the effective line, for example, a replay stops on the left drum 2a, a bell stops on the middle drum 2b, and a square (blue) stops on the right drum 2c. When the second minor winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the conditional device of FR2 (Fruit 2) is activated. Assuming that the FR2 wins internally by itself, regardless of the stop operation sequence or timing of the stop button unit 10, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbols stop on the activated line and win without fail ( The bell pattern is displayed in a straight line downward to the right). As will be described later, in the RT0 state or RT1 state, the second minor combination is, in most cases, simultaneously won with a one-piece minor combination (obstructive minor combination) for pressing order control. Similarly, the second target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the second target minor combination is notified. In addition, it is one of the normal small roles.

(6) 3rd small win (FR3: 3rd target small win): When the 3rd small win wins, the bell pattern is aligned on the lower stage of the left drum 2a, the bell symbol on the middle stage of the middle drum 2b, and the bell symbol on the upper stage of the right drum 2c. is stopped and displayed, and the number of acquired cards (the number of cards to be paid out) is nine. However, on the effective line, for example, a pentagon (white) on the left drum 2a, a bell on the middle drum 2b, and a replay stop on the right drum 2c. When the 3rd small winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the FR3 (fruit 3) conditional device is activated. Assuming that the FR3 is internally won by itself, regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button section 10, the symbols are arranged so that the above predetermined symbols stop on the activated line and win without fail ( The bell pattern is displayed in a straight line upward to the right). As will be described later, in the RT0 state or the RT1 state, the third minor combination is, in most cases, simultaneously won with a one-piece minor combination (obstructive minor combination) for pressing order control. Similarly, the third target minor combination is a minor combination that should be won, and the player wins if the pressing order is correct, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the pushing order is incorrect, the hindering minor role wins or loses. When the assist function is activated, the operation order of the stop button section 10 for winning the first target minor combination is notified. In addition, it is one of the normal small roles.

(7) Common bell small combination (FR4): When the common bell small combination wins, the bell pattern is displayed in the upper row of the left drum 2a, the upper row of the middle drum 2b, and the upper row of the right drum 2c. , the number of coins to be acquired (the number of coins to be paid out) is 9. However, other predetermined symbols are stopped on the activated line. When the second small winning combination is internally won in the winning combination lottery, the conditional device of FR4 (Fruit 2) is activated. In FR4, regardless of the stop operation order and timing of the stop button section 10, the symbols are arranged so that the above-mentioned predetermined symbols stop on the activated line and the prize is always won. ). In addition, it is one of the normal small roles.

(8) 1 small hand (obstructive small hand for push order control: FR5 to FRn): A small hand (bonus obstructive small hand) for preventing the above-mentioned bonus hand from being drawn in, and when winning, the number of acquisitions ( The payout number) is 1. Also, if any one of the first to third target small wins is simultaneously won and the pressing order is incorrect, it is a small win (bonus inhibiting small win) for preventing each target small win. It should be noted that n is an arbitrary integer, and is determined according to design needs, and as a result, the number of types of one-piece small wins is n+3. A common one-card winning combination (one-card common winning combination) is formed by winning one or more one-card winning combinations. When a rare small winning combination (cherry, watermelon, chance eye) and a common one small winning combination are won at the same time, the main control unit 100 changes the drawn small winning combination pattern between inside RB1 and inside RB2. That is, the main control unit 100 stops any symbol of the common one-piece small combination during RB1 and does not allow the rare small combination to be won, but conversely stops the rare small combination symbols during RB2. Then, stop control is performed so that any one of the common small wins is not won. This makes a difference in the degree of advantage. In addition, it is one of the normal small roles.

(9) Middle stage cherry combination (FRn+1): This is the combination name when cherry symbols on the left drum 2a and bell or replay symbols on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c are aligned and stopped on the effective line. (denoted as Cherry/ANY/ANY). When the middle stage cherry combination is internally won in the lottery, one condition device (and a plurality of common one-card combinations) of FRn+1 (fruit n+1) is activated. If you aim at the black bar on the left reel, the cherry pattern stops and the AT bonus (assist bonus) is fixed. When a big-sized pattern (upper and lower-sized patterns) is aimed at the left reel, the large-sized pattern stops at the lower stage, so that it is powerful and can give excitement to the player. In addition, the big bonus combination, the middle stage cherry combination, and the common one-card combination may be won at the same time, and in this case, the AT bonus and the big bonus are determined. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(8) Strong Cherry (FRn+2): This is the name of the hand when three cherry symbols are aligned on the lower row of the left drum 2a and three cherry symbols rising to the right on the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c, and the winning number is 1. becomes. In addition, a big bonus combination, a strong cherry combination, and a common single combination may be won at the same time, and an AT bonus is drawn with a high probability. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(9) Middle Cherry (FRn+3): A cherry symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left drum 2a, a cherry symbol is displayed on the middle drum 2b, and a symbol other than a cherry symbol is displayed on the right drum 2c. The number of sheets is one. In addition, a big bonus combination, a medium cherry combination, and a common one-piece combination may be won at the same time, and an AT bonus is drawn with a medium probability. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(10) Weak cherry combination (FRn+4): The lower stage of the left drum 2a has a cherry symbol, the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c stop with symbols other than the cherry symbol, and the winning number is 1. In addition, a big bonus combination, a weak cherry combination, and a common one-card combination may be won at the same time, and an AT bonus is drawn by lottery with a low probability. In any cherry hand, a common small hand and a common single hand are won at the same time. The stop control of whether or not to pull in the symbols that make up the winning combination is changed. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(11) Watermelon role (FRn+5): A role name when three watermelon symbols are aligned on the upper row of the left drum 2a and three watermelon symbols descending to the right on the middle drum 2b and the right drum 2c, and the number of winning is one. Become. Also, a big bonus role, a watermelon role, and a common one-piece role may be won at the same time, and an AT bonus is drawn with a high probability. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(12) Chance game (FRn+6): This is the name of the winning combination when the upper row of the left drum 2a has a watermelon pattern, and the middle drum 2b and right drum 2c stop with the watermelon pattern falling to the right and missing. becomes. Also, a big bonus combination, a chance combination, and a common one-card combination may be won at the same time, and an AT bonus is drawn with a high probability or a low probability. As for the watermelon role and the chance role, the common small role and the common one-piece role are won at the same time. The stop control of whether or not to pull in the symbols that constitute both hands is changed. In addition, it is one of the rare small roles.

(13) Replay (replay): This is a role name when replay symbols are aligned on three drums on the effective line, and medals are not obtained for this. When an internal win is made, an RP flag is set in a flag area, and even when the RP flag is won alone or when a bonus combination is won at the same time, the replay is always won and operated. The replay consists of one type of combined symbol, and the player can operate the start lever 9 to play the next game without inserting medals. It should be noted that even if the replay is activated, it does not trigger a change in RT (probability of winning a replay). Replay roles include special replay roles and fake replay roles. A compound replay combination is a replay combination in which a plurality of special replay combinations, fake replay combinations, and the like are simultaneously won in addition to a normal replay combination. A main control unit 100 performs a process that is more advantageous for an assist game in the second regular bonus internal game than in the first regular bonus internal game, when a compound replay combination (composite replay combination) is won. . In other words, when the special replay combination can be drawn in, advantageous processing is performed regardless of whether the player wins or fails to win.

In FIG. 107B, the general game (indicated as "general game" in the figure) starts from the next game after the big bonus game (RBB game) has ended or after the setting is changed. The replay probability (probability of winning the replay) in this general game is about 1/7.3 (number 8978/65536) (initial replay state: normal game in which the replay probability does not change).

In a general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is internally won, and when RBB wins in the game, the RBB game is started from the next game. The RBB game ends when the payout of medals exceeds a predetermined number of 50, and the normal replay state with a low probability of winning a replay combination starts from the next game. In addition, the general game->the RBB is internally won->the RBB winning->the RBB game pays out more than 50 coins->the RBB game ends->the general game is repeated. In other words, pachislot games include a normal game in which at least a replay combination is won with a predetermined probability, and a big bonus game in which a shift occurs when a big bonus combination (RBB) is won and activated in the normal game. In addition, there is also an internal RBB game in which an internal winning state occurs without being activated.

In the assist game, in the general game, RBB internal middle game, and big bonus general game, the operation mode of the stop button is notified, and if the player operates (operates in the winning mode) as instructed, a profit for the player (for example, You can get game medals, AT lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), by continuously winning transition replays, changing the RT state, and making it less likely to come off, the rate of increase in payout medals in the assist game can be increased.

The big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, and a regular bonus game (SRB game) in which a regular bonus combination (RB1 or RB2) is won in the big bonus general game, a pattern is displayed, and the pattern is activated. , there is a regular bonus inside game (inside RB1 or inside RB2) in which any winning regular bonus combination does not operate and becomes an internal winning state. This regular bonus combination includes at least two types of normal regular bonus combination (RB1) and a more advantageous regular bonus combination (RB2). RB1 is also called a bad RB, and RB2 is also called a good RB.

Either one wins with a high probability in the big bonus general game. For example, with a probability of 1/3 for RB1 and a probability of 2/3 for RB2, any RB can always win the first game at the same time as a small winning combination or a replay winning combination. When any RB becomes an internal winning state, the winning probability of the replaying combination fluctuates, for example, a range of 1/65536 to 65/65536 (approximately 1/10,000) where it is out (not winning). occurs. An RB in an internally elected state can be made to win a prize when a winning combination is lost or a minor winning combination is lost.

When the first regular bonus combination (normal regular bonus combination) is internally elected during the big bonus game (during the RBB game), the next game is the first regular bonus internal game. On the other hand, if the second regular bonus combination (advantageous regular bonus combination) is internally elected during the big bonus game, the second regular bonus internal middle game is started. The main control unit 100, in either the normal game or the first regular bonus internal middle game, or in both games, composite small wins (for example, a plurality of common one-sheet small wins, first to third bell small wins, A common small bell win and a rare small win are won at the same time.) are won, one small win or a small bell win are won, but the rare small win is kicked out and not won. On the other hand, the main control unit 100 controls that, in the medium game within the advantageous regular bonus, a composite small win (for example, a plurality of common one-sheet small wins, first to third bell small wins, common bell small wins, and rare small wins can be played at the same time). ) wins, a rare small winning combination is drawn in to win a prize, but a one-piece small winning combination or a bell small winning combination is kicked out and not awarded. It should be noted that even if the pull-in control is performed, there are cases where the winning combination of cherry, watermelon, chance, and one small combination is missed.

When a composite minor win is won, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) provides an AT bonus (assist game or information game) in the second regular bonus internal middle game rather than in the first regular bonus internal middle game. take action in favor of For example, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) wins a single small win or a small bell win in the first regular bonus internal middle game, even if any of the combined small wins is won, and the AT bonus is awarded. A win-lose lottery and an additional lottery are not performed, but on the other hand, if any composite small role is won in the middle game inside the second regular bonus, a rare small role is won, and an AT bonus win-loss lottery, an extra lottery, and a stock lottery are awarded. etc. (perform advantageous processing for the assist game). Further, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing that is more advantageous to the assist game in the game during the second regular bonus than in the normal game. Further, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing with different degrees of advantage, such as normal game<game during first regular bonus period<game during second regular bonus period. Specifically, when a composite minor winning combination is won, the main control unit 100 performs a process of kicking away a rare minor winning combination in a normal game, and cancels a part of the rare small winning combination in a middle game within the first regular bonus. It is also possible to carry out a drawing-in process, a process of drawing in all the rare small wins in the composite small wins in the middle game inside the second regular bonus, and perform a process advantageous to the assist game when the rare small wins are controlled to be drawn in.例文帳に追加

108 to 111 are schematic diagrams showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order. Using these figures, the stop control when a composite minor winning combination is won will be described in detail.

First, in a normal game in which a replay combination is won with a predetermined probability (1/7.3), when a big bonus combination is won and operating symbols are displayed (for example, blue 7, blue 7, blue 7), Shift to a big bonus game. The big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, in which a small winning combination is won with the same probability as in the normal game. In the big bonus general game, there are a regular bonus game in which a regular bonus combination is won and activated, and a regular bonus internal middle game in which the winning regular bonus combination is not activated and is in an internal winning state. There are at least two types of regular bonus hands, a first regular bonus hand and a second regular bonus hand that is more advantageous than the first regular bonus hand. In the game during the first regular bonus, by operating the stop switch, a normal small winning combination pattern is drawn in, and a plurality of reels are controlled to stop so that the normal small winning combination is won. On the other hand, in the second regular bonus internal middle game, by operating the stop switch, a plurality of spinning drums are stopped and controlled so as to attract a rare small winning combination and win a rare small winning combination. That is, the main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing that is more advantageous for the AT bonus (assist game) in the second regular bonus internal game than in the first regular bonus internal game. transfer lottery, AT lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). If an operation other than the left 1st operation is performed during the normal game, it becomes a penalty, and the assist lottery is not performed for several games. Similarly, any operation other than the left 1st operation inside the RB becomes a penalty.

Referring to FIG. 108, in the RB1 internal middle game (first regular bonus internal winning middle game), when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won, a common bell small winning combination (FR4), a plurality of single small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) Any one of them is plural) and the middle stage cherry combination are in a winning state at the same time. FIG. 108(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell symbol (replay symbol on the effective line) stops on the upper row (Fig. 108 (B1). reference). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the bell pattern (replay pattern on the active line) stops on the upper row (see FIG. 108(C1)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell pattern (the watermelon pattern on the active line) stops on the upper row, the bell pattern is displayed in a straight line on the upper row, and the upper bell wins (Fig. 108 ( D1)). The payout is 9 coins.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal middle game (second regular bonus internal middle game), when the composite small winning combination 1 is internally won, the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the cherry symbol stops in the middle of the active line (see FIG. 108 (B2)). In addition, if you aim for the white 7 symbols, the upper shin symbol will stop in the middle row and the lower shin symbol will stop in the lower row, so it is impressive. The main control unit 100 draws and controls the cherry symbol or the upper shin symbol in the middle stage, which has a large payout of 9 bells in the upper stage, but has a large number of combination symbols.

When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the replay symbols are stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 108(C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell pattern stops in the upper row and the middle cherry wins (see FIG. 108 (D2)). The payout is 1 card.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) determines that even when the same composite minor winning combination 1 is internally won, the assist game (AT bonus, etc.) is higher in the second regular bonus internal middle game than in the first regular bonus internal middle game. ) (Perform AT bonus winning lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, wins internally, and if RBB does not win in the game, the game shifts to RBB internal middle game. Even in this RBB internal middle game, when the composite minor winning combination 1 is internally won, the main control unit 100 can perform an advantageous process by performing pull-in control so as to win the middle stage cherry. In the RBB internal game, for example, in the game after the net loss is won and the RBB pattern can be drawn in, the advantageous processing is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an intended attack. On the other hand, in the RBB internal game in the general game (normal game), the stop control may not be changed, and disadvantageous control may be performed in the same manner as in the first regular bonus internal game. .

Referring to FIG. 109, in the RB1 internal middle game (first regular bonus internal winning middle game), when the composite small winning combination 2 is internally won, a plurality of one-sheet small winning combinations (any of FR5 to FRn are plural) and a strong cherry Both roles are elected at the same time. FIG. 109(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell pattern (replay pattern of one minor winning pattern on the effective line) stops on the upper row. (See FIG. 109 (B1)). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the watermelon symbol stops on the middle effective line and the one-piece small combination becomes a tenpai state (see FIG. 109 (C1)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell symbol stops on the active line in the middle, and a small combination is won (see FIG. 109 (D1)). The payout is 1 card. It should be noted that this one-piece small winning combination may be missed when the symbols are not within the drawable range.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal middle game (second regular bonus internal middle game), when the composite small winning combination 2 is internally won, the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the black bar symbol stops in the middle of the activated line (see FIG. 109 (B2)).

When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the cherry pattern is stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 109(C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the cherry symbol stops on the upper row and a strong cherry wins (see FIG. 109 (D2)). Three cherry symbols are displayed upward to the right, and the payout is one.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) determines that even when the same composite minor winning combination 2 is internally won, the assist game (AT bonus, etc.) is higher in the second regular bonus internal middle game than in the first regular bonus internal middle game. ) (Perform AT bonus winning lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, wins internally, and if RBB does not win in the game, the game shifts to RBB internal middle game. Even in this RBB internal middle game, the main control unit 100 can also perform advantageous processing by performing pull-in control so as to win a strong cherry when the composite minor winning combination 2 is internally won. In the RBB internal game, for example, in the game after the net loss is won and the RBB pattern can be drawn in, the advantageous processing is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an intended attack. On the other hand, in the RBB internal game in the general game (normal game), the stop control may not be changed, and disadvantageous control may be performed in the same manner as in the first regular bonus internal game. .

When the composite small winning combination 3 is internally won, a plurality of single small winning combinations (any of FR5 to FRn are plural) and medium cherry winning combination are simultaneously won. Further, when the composite small winning combination 4 is internally won, a plurality of single small winning combinations (any of FR5 to FRn is plural) and a weak cherry combination are simultaneously won. FIG. 109(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating. 109(B1), 109(C1) and 109(D1) are the same as when the composite small winning combination 2 is won internally when the composite small winning combination 3 or the composite small winning combination 4 is won in the RB1 internal middle game. Use the description.

Also, in the middle game inside RB2, when the composite small winning combination 3 or the composite small winning combination 4 is won, the explanation is used since it is the same up to FIG. 109 (B2). When the composite small winning combination 3 is internally won, operating the middle stop button 10b in the second stop causes the cherry symbol to stop in the middle row (see FIG. 109 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the middle cherry is won without stopping the cherry symbol on the upper stage (not shown). On the other hand, when the composite small winning combination 4 is internally won, if the middle stop button 10b is operated for the second stop, the cherry symbol does not stop in the middle row, and if the right stop button 10c is operated for the third stop, the cherry symbol appears. Without stopping in the frame, the weak cherry combination wins (not shown). Both payouts are one.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) assists the second regular bonus internal middle game more than the first regular bonus internal middle game even when the same composite small winning combination 3 or composite small winning combination 4 is internally won. To perform advantageous processing for a game (AT bonus, etc.) (execute an AT bonus win/lose lottery, an additional lottery, a stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, is internally won, and if RBB does not win in the game, the game shifts to RBB internal middle game. Even in this RBB internal middle game, when the composite minor winning combination 1 is internally won, the main control unit 100 can perform an advantageous process by performing pull-in control so as to win the middle stage cherry. In the RBB internal game, for example, in the game after the net loss is won and the RBB pattern can be drawn in, the advantageous processing is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an intended attack. On the other hand, in the RBB internal game in the general game (normal game), the stop control may not be changed, and disadvantageous control may be performed in the same manner as in the first regular bonus internal game. .

Referring to FIG. 110, in the RB1 internal middle game (first regular bonus internal winning middle game), when the composite small winning combination 5 is internally won, the second small winning combination (FR4), a plurality of single small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) Any one of them is plural) and the watermelon role will be in a winning state at the same time. FIG. 110(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

When the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point on the left reel and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop, the bell symbol (replay symbol on the effective line) stops on the upper row (Fig. 110 (B1). reference). At this time, the cherry pattern is stopped outside the frame by kicking control. Also, the watermelon pattern is not pulled into the upper stage. When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the bell pattern is stopped on the middle active line (see FIG. 110(C1)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the bell pattern (replay pattern on the active line) stops at the bottom, and the bell pattern is displayed in a straight line downward to the right, and the lower right bell (second small win) is displayed. ) wins (see FIG. 110 (D1)). The payout is 9 coins.

On the other hand, in the RB2 internal middle game (second regular bonus internal middle game), when the composite small winning combination 5 is internally won, the player aims at the black bar of the DDT point and operates the left stop button 10a at the first stop. , the black bar is kicked out of the frame, the bell pattern stops in the middle row on the effective line, and the watermelon pattern is displayed in the upper row (see FIG. 110 (B2)).

When the middle stop button 10b is operated in the second stop, the watermelon design stops in the middle row (see FIG. 110 (C2)). When the right stop button 10c is operated at the third stop, the watermelon pattern stops on the lower row, and the watermelon combination wins (see FIG. 110 (D2)). Three watermelon symbols are displayed downward to the right, and the payout is one.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) determines that even when the same composite minor winning combination 5 is internally elected, the assist game (AT bonus, etc.) is higher in the second regular bonus internal middle game than in the first regular bonus internal middle game. ) (Perform AT bonus winning lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, wins internally, and if RBB does not win in the game, the game shifts to RBB internal middle game. Even in this RBB internal middle game, when the composite minor winning combination 1 is internally won, the main control unit 100 can perform an advantageous process by performing pull-in control so as to win the middle stage cherry. In the RBB internal game, for example, in the game after the net loss is won and the RBB pattern can be drawn in, the advantageous processing is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an intended attack. On the other hand, in the RBB internal game in the general game (normal game), the stop control may not be changed, and disadvantageous control may be performed in the same manner as in the first regular bonus internal game. .

Referring to FIG. 111, in the RB1 internal middle game (first regular bonus internal winning middle game), when the composite small winning combination 6 is internally won, the second small winning combination (FR4), a plurality of single small winning combinations (FR5 to FRn) any of which is plural) and a chance game are in a winning state at the same time. FIG. 111(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating. 110 (B1) to 110 (D1), and 110 (B2) to 110 (C2) when the composite small winning combination 6 is won in the RB1 internal middle game, and when the composite small winning combination 5 is won internally. Since they are the same, the explanation is used.

In the state of FIG. 111 (C2), when the right stop button 10c is operated for the third stop, the watermelon symbol is stopped on the activated line, and the white 7 symbols (blue 7 symbols or red bar symbols may be used) are displayed in the lower row. A chance wins. The payout is 1 card.

The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) determines that even when the same composite minor winning combination 6 is internally elected, the second regular bonus internal middle game is more likely to play an assist game (AT bonus, etc.) than the first regular bonus internal middle game. ) (Perform AT bonus winning lottery, additional lottery, stock lottery, etc.). In the general game (ordinary game), RBB, which is a big bonus combination, wins internally, and if RBB does not win in the game, the game shifts to RBB internal middle game. Even in this RBB internal middle game, when the composite minor winning combination 1 is internally won, the main control unit 100 can perform an advantageous process by performing pull-in control so as to win the middle stage cherry. In the RBB internal game, for example, in the game after the net loss is won and the RBB pattern can be drawn in, the advantageous processing is not performed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an intended attack. On the other hand, in the RBB internal game in the general game (normal game), the stop control may not be changed, and disadvantageous control may be performed in the same manner as in the first regular bonus internal game.

112 and 113 are schematic diagrams showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order. Using these figures, the stop control when the shift RB combination (RB1 or RB2) is won will be described in detail.

In the normal game described above, when the big bonus combination is won and the operating symbols are displayed (for example, blue 7, blue 7, blue 7), the game shifts to the big bonus game. The first game of the big bonus game is a big bonus general game, but after the first game, a regular bonus combination can be won. In the big bonus general game, when one of the shift RB combinations is won, the display effect device 11 is reverse-pressed while all the reels are spinning (see FIG. 112(A)) to display 7 white symbols. Give an instruction to aim at a specific symbol).

First, the case where the second regular bonus combination is won will be described. When the right 1st operation (operation of the right stop button 10c) is aimed correctly at the 7 white symbols, the 7 white symbols stop on the effective line (see FIG. 112(B)). It should be noted that the white 7 symbols stopping at the center is a misalignment symbol, but a single combination (a combination in which the white 7 symbols stop in a straight line at the center) may be won at the same time.

When the white 7 symbols are aimed correctly by the second stop operation of the middle stop button 10b, the white 7 symbols stop on the effective line (see FIG. 112 (C1)). Similarly, when the player correctly aims at the 7 white symbols by the second stop operation of the left stop button 10a, the 7 white symbols stop on the effective line (see FIG. 112 (C2)). In both cases, the white 7 patterns are displayed in a straight line, resulting in a white 7 tenpai state. In the third stop operation, if the white 7 symbols are aimed correctly and the final stop button is operated, the white 7 symbols will stop in a straight line at the center (see FIG. 112 (C3)). This clearly informs the player that the second regular bonus combination, which is more advantageous than the first regular bonus combination, has been internally won. It should be noted that the 7 white symbols stopping in a straight line in the center is a missed combination in the second regular bonus combination, but it may be a single combination in which the 7 white symbols stop in a straight line in the center.

Next, the case where the disadvantageous first regular bonus combination is won will be described. 112(A) to 112(C2) are the same in FIG. 113, the above description is used. In the state of FIG. 113 (C1), if the white 7 symbol is aimed correctly by the third stop operation of the left stop button 10a, the symbol will slip and the white 7 symbol will stop in the lower stage, indicating a miss (FIG. 113 (C3)). reference). It should be noted that the white 7 symbols never stop at the upper or middle stage. Similarly, in the state of FIG. 113 (C2), if the white 7 symbol is aimed correctly by the third stop operation of the middle stop button 10b, the white 7 symbol will stop in the upper row without slipping, indicating that the white 7 symbol is out (Fig. 113C2). 113 (C3)). Alternatively, the symbols slide and white 7 symbols stop at the bottom (not shown). This clearly informs the player that the disadvantageous first regular bonus combination has been internally won. This reverse push instruction is issued only when one of the shift RB roles is won in the big bonus general game. Issue an instruction to stop. As a result, white 7 symbols do not stop at the center. In other words, when the white 7 symbols are targeted by the reverse push 1st operation, in a game in which the white 7 symbols are in a tense state (then, in a game in which the white 7 symbols are aligned or missed), an instruction is given not to reverse push.

The points of inventive step of this embodiment are summarized. A winning combination that wins a prize changes according to the type of shift RB (two or more types) that is established during one type of BB in general. For example, when the winning hand AB (A is a bell, B is a cherry, a watermelon, a chance, and a combination of them) is won, if the shift RB (A) is inside, the winning hand A wins, and the shift RB ( B) The content of the invention is that the winning combination B wins a prize in the case of inside. The ideas (technical ideas) that can be realized by changing according to the type of shift RB in which the prize-winning role is inside are as follows.

1) When inside the shift RB during the type BB, it is possible to change the winning/operating role (including replay) according to the type of shift RB. For example, in case of A, only bell and replay win/activate, and in case of B, bell/rare roles (watermelon, cherry) and replay win/activate.

2) It is possible to change the expected number of net increase per 1G in the inside of shift RB in a kind of BB by changing the winning combination (out). For example, in the case of A, the net increase is 2.0 (there are many bells won), and in the case of B, the net increase is 1.0 (some of the bells change to rare roles with less payouts and win). As an effect, since the RBB is finished with a predetermined number of payouts, the number of games is longer in the second regular bonus internal game than in the first regular bonus internal game. The reason for this is that the net increase in the number of games played during the second regular bonus is small, and the number of games is lengthened until the end condition by payout is achieved. In other words, the favorable conditions will continue for a long time.

3) Due to the change in the winning combination (outside), the lottery of the instruction function inside the shift RB in the kind of BB changes, and the winning probability depends on the RB in the inside. For example, in the case of A, there are more bells, so the instruction function lottery probability with the bell is low. higher probability.

4) By having an RT state according to the type of shift RB that has become internal, it is possible to change the probability of the instruction function lottery for each RT state. For example, the inside of shift RB (A) is RT1 and the inside of shift RB (B) is RT2, and when winning a normal bell, the instruction function lottery can be performed with RT1<RT2.

5) It is necessary to take countermeasures against shift RB type switching strategy due to shift RB operation. In other words, if the loss in the shift RB cannot be filled by replay, by arbitrarily activating the disadvantageous shift RB, return to the RBB normal game again and wait for the winning of the higher shift RB, which is the advantageous RB. It is a measure against the law. While the shift RB (A) game is digested, the lottery for shift RB (A) is strong (or lottery for shift RB (A) only), while the shift RB (B) is digested, the lottery for shift RB (B) is strong ( Or draw shift RB (B) only). For example, during the shift RB (A) game, shift RB (A) is won in the first game with a probability of 100% to maintain the internal winning state, and when the shift RB (A) game ends, shift RB ( A) to be in an internal elected state. On the other hand, during the shift RB (B) game, the shift RB (B) is won in the first game with a probability of 100% to maintain the internal winning state, and when the shift RB (B) game ends, the shift RB is sure to Make (B) be in an internal winning state.

6) It is possible to create a game with reels when the shift RB is inside. That is, it is possible to determine the type of shift RB in the internal middle state by the result when the shift RB is removed. Instruct to aim for 7 with a 7 pattern arrangement that doubles when Shift RB (A) or Shift RB (B) is won. For example, it is possible to appeal to the player the contents such as shift RB (A) if the aligned 7 is red, and shift RB (B) if it is white. On the other hand, in the above pattern, it is possible to see the inside, but on the contrary, it is possible to make it so that the result is the same when it is removed, and the type of shift RB is not known. For example, as shown in FIG. 112, when the game shifts to the big bonus game and one of the regular bonus hands is won, an instruction is given to aim at the white 7 symbols by pressing in the reverse direction, and the white 7 symbols are aligned in a straight line at the center. It is stopped (see FIG. 112 (C3)).

114 and 115 are schematic diagrams showing the pattern display state of the window in chronological order. Using these figures, the stop control when a composite replay combination is won will be described in detail.

Composite replay roles are normal replay roles (for example, replay symbols are displayed in a horizontal straight line or diagonal horizontal straight line) and special replay roles (for example, white 7 symbols are displayed in a horizontal straight line or a diagonal horizontal straight line in the upper or lower row). ) is a replay combination in which multiple wins are made at the same time. Also, a fake replay combination (for example, two white 7 symbols are displayed ten times, but the white 7 symbols are not displayed in a straight line) is a replay combination in which a plurality of wins are made at the same time. In other words, a composite replay combination is a replay combination in which a plurality of normal replay combinations, special replay combinations, and fake replay combinations are simultaneously won.

In the normal game described above, when the big bonus combination is won and the operating symbols are displayed (for example, blue 7, blue 7, blue 7), the game shifts to the big bonus game. In this big bonus game, RB1 or RB2 (both shift RB) is internally won, and the game is shifted to the RB internal middle game without winning a prize. It should be noted that the replay winning probability is the same in both the RB1 internal game and the RB2 internal game (for example, RTn state). That is, in the RTn state, the probability of winning the combined replay combination is the same.

Referring to FIG. 114, in the RB2 internal middle game (second regular bonus internal winning game), if a composite replay combination is internally won, a plurality of replay combinations are won at the same time, but at least a normal replay combination and a special replay combination are included. be This special replay combination is a combination that performs a lottery process that is advantageous for the assist game (third bonus information game). The composite replay combination 1 is a replay combination in which a plurality of normal replay combinations, special replay combinations and fake replay combinations are simultaneously won. In addition, the composite replay role 2 is a replay role in which a plurality of normal replay roles and special replay roles are won at the same time, but the fake replay role is not won. It becomes possible. FIG. 114(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

In the RB2 internal middle game, when the composite replay combination 1 is won, the main control unit 100 transmits a command to the sub control unit 160, and the display effect device 11 is reverse-pressed to display 7 white symbols (“specific symbols” in the claims). ) is to be aimed at.

When the player aims at the white 7 symbols on the right drum 2c and correctly operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop, the white 7 symbols (the watermelon symbol on the effective line) stops on the bottom of the reel (Fig. 114 ( B)). In the second stop, if the middle stop button 10b is operated correctly aiming at the white 7 symbols on the middle drum 2b, the white 7 symbols will stop on the activated line (see FIG. 114 (C1)). On the other hand, in the second stop, if the left stop button 10a is operated correctly aiming at the 7 white symbols on the left drum 2a, the 7 white symbols (upper Chile symbols on the effective line) stop on the upper reel (Fig. 114 (C2)).

In the state of FIG. 114 (C1), when the player correctly operates the left stop button 10a aiming at the 7 white symbols on the left drum 2a at the 3rd stop, the 7 white symbols are displayed on the upper stage of the reel. Chile symbol) is stopped, and white 7 symbols are displayed in a straight line downward to the right (see FIG. 114(D)). In the state shown in FIG. 114 (C2), when the player, in the third stop, aims at the 7 white symbols on the middle drum 2b and correctly operates the middle stop button 10b, the 7 white symbols stop on the activated line, and the white 7 symbols are stopped. Seven symbols are displayed in a straight line downward to the right (see FIG. 114(D)). That is, when the composite replay combination 1 is won in the RB2 internal middle game, the main control unit 100 instructs the reverse push and performs pull-in control so as to win the special replay combination. controls kicking. However, if the pattern of the special replay combination cannot be pulled in, one of the other replay combinations is guaranteed to win. In the RB2 internal middle game, similarly, when the composite replay combination 2 is won, the main control unit 100 transmits a command to the sub control unit 160 and pushes the display effect device 11 in reverse to aim for the white 7 symbol. If it is operated correctly, a special replay role will be awarded. The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) performs processing advantageous to the assist game (third bonus) even if the combined replay combination 1 is won or the combined replay combination 2 is won during the RB2 internal game. Do it.

Referring to FIG. 115, in the RB1 internal middle game (first regular bonus internal winning game), if a composite replay combination is internally won, a plurality of replay combinations are won at the same time, but at least a normal replay combination and a special replay combination are included. be This special replay combination is a combination that performs a lottery process that is advantageous for the assist game (third bonus information game). The composite replay combination 1 is a replay combination in which a plurality of normal replay combinations, special replay combinations and fake replay combinations are simultaneously won. In addition, the composite replay role 2 is a replay role in which a plurality of normal replay roles and special replay roles are won at the same time, but the fake replay role is not won. It becomes possible. FIG. 115(A) shows a state in which three reels are rotating.

In the RB1 internal middle game, when the composite replay combination 1 is won, the main control unit 100 transmits a command to the sub-control unit 160, and pushes the display effect device 11 in the opposite direction to display 7 white symbols (“specific symbols” in the claims). ) is to be aimed at.

When the player aims at the white 7 symbols on the right drum 2c and correctly operates the right stop button 10c at the first stop, the white 7 symbols (the watermelon symbol on the effective line) stops on the reel bottom (Fig. 115 ( B)). In the second stop, if the center stop button 10b is operated correctly aiming at the white 7 symbols on the middle drum 2b, the white 7 symbols will stop on the activated line (see FIG. 115 (C1)). On the other hand, in the second stop, if the left stop button 10a is operated correctly aiming at the 7 white symbols on the left drum 2a, the 7 white symbols (upper Chile symbols on the effective line) stop on the upper reel (Fig. 115 (C2)).

In the state of FIG. 115 (C1), even if the player correctly operates the left stop button 10a aiming at the 7 white symbols on the left drum 2a at the 3rd stop, 7 white symbols are displayed outside the reel upper row or the reel lower row. is stopped so that white 7 symbols are not displayed in a straight line (see FIG. 115 (D1)). In addition, in the state of FIG. 115 (C2), even if the player correctly operates the middle stop button 10b while aiming at the 7 white symbols on the middle drum 2b in the third stop, the white reel will be displayed outside the upper row of the reels or the lower row of the reels. The 7 symbols are stopped, and the 7 white symbols are not displayed in a straight line (see FIG. 115 (D2)). That is, when the composite replay role 1 is won in the RB1 internal middle game, the main control unit 100 instructs the reverse push and performs kicking control so as not to win the special replay role, but the fake replay role and the normal replay role. performs the pull-in control. However, if the pattern of the special replay combination cannot be pulled in, one of the other replay combinations is guaranteed to win. In the RB1 internal middle game, similarly, when the composite replay combination 2 is won, the main control unit 100 transmits a command to the sub control unit 160 and pushes the display effect device 11 in reverse to aim for the white 7 symbol. If it is operated correctly, a special replay role will be awarded. The main control unit 100 (advantageous processing means) does not perform advantageous processing for the assist game (third bonus) even if the composite replay combination 1 is won during the RB1 internal game, but the composite replay combination 2 is won. Advantageous processing is then performed.

In summary, the pachi-slot machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of reels (three reels) having a plurality of types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface, and a lottery for a role using lottery data in the game. Lottery means (main control unit 100) rotates a plurality of spinning drums in a game, receives operation of a stop switch provided corresponding to each spinning drum, and individually stops the corresponding spinning drum, Control means (main control unit 100) for displaying symbols according to the lottery result of the combination, game processing means (main control unit 100) for performing game processing in the game, and a display effect device capable of displaying effects (liquid crystal display device, LED, speaker, etc.). The winning combination determined by lottery by the winning lottery means includes at least a big bonus combination, a regular bonus combination, a small combination and a replay combination. There are a game, a big bonus game in which the big bonus combination is won in the normal game and is activated, and an assist game in which the operation procedure of the stop switch is notified.

Replay hands include at least a special replay hand (three white 7s are displayed in a straight line) and a fake replay hand (two white 7s are displayed in a straight line, but three are not aligned). There is a compound replay combination in which a plurality of replay combinations are won at the same time, and when a special replay combination is activated, specific patterns (white 7 patterns) are displayed in a straight line. The big bonus game includes a big bonus general game, a regular bonus game in which a regular bonus combination is won and activated in the big bonus general game, and an internal winning state in which the winning regular bonus combination does not operate. There is a game inside the regular bonus that has become.

The regular bonus combination includes a first regular bonus combination (unfavorable RB) and a second regular bonus combination (advantageous RB) that is more advantageous than the first regular bonus combination. There are a first regular bonus internal game in which the regular bonus combination is internally elected, and a second regular bonus internal internal game in which the second regular bonus combination is internally elected.

In any of the regular bonus internal games (disadvantageous RB and advantageous RB), when a complex replay role is won and the display effect device displays an aiming effect for aiming at the specific symbol (Fig. 114 (A) and reverse pressing white 7 aim effect in FIG. Stop control is performed for the plurality of spinning drums (see FIGS. 114(B), (C1) and (C2), and see FIGS. 115(B), (C1) and (C2)).

When the final operation of the stop switch is performed in a ten-pie state in which two specific symbols are aligned on a straight line, and if the second regular bonus internal game is being played, the control means displays a special replay on the activated line. The winning pattern is drawn in, and the rotating drum is controlled to stop so that the special replaying role can be activated (see FIG. 114(D)). On the other hand, in the case of the game during the first regular bonus, the control means draws the fake re-game symbol on the activated line, and rotates the spinning drum so that the fake re-game role can be activated. Stop control is performed (see (D1) and (D2) in FIG. 115). When a complex replay combination is won, the game processing means (main control unit 100) makes the second regular bonus internal game more advantageous for the assist game than the first regular bonus internal game. processing. As this advantageous process, a win-lose lottery for an assist game, a stock lottery, an additional lottery, a high-probability transition lottery, and the like can be mentioned.

1 reel-type game machine main body 1a housing 1b front door 2 drum section 2a left drum 2b middle drum 2c right drum 3 window section 4 display LED block 4a insertion number LED
4b Medal storage number display LED
4c Medal payout display LED
4d Replay display LED 4d
4e Error display LED
4f Display LED during production
5 Medal insertion part 5a Left light transmission part 5b Right light transmission part 6 Settlement button (credit return switch)
7 1 bet button 8 Max bet button 9 Start lever 10 Stop button part 10a Left stop button 10b Middle stop button 10c Right stop button 11 Display effect device 12 Speaker part 12a Upper left speaker 12b Upper right speaker 12c Lower left speaker 12d Lower right speaker 13 Game state Display LED section 14 Special button 15 Saucer 16 Medal payout port 17 Logo panel section 18 Medal payout device 19 Door keyhole 20 Return button 21 Transparent panel 22 Design panel 23 Ornament 24 Electric drive 25 Input SW section 26 Clock section 27 Reflector 28 Power supply unit 28a Setting key switch 28b Error release switch 28c Power switch 28d Keyhole 50 Card balance display unit 51 Lending button 52 Return button 100 Main control unit 101 ROM
102 RAMs
110 start switch sensor 111 operation direction sensor 112 special button sensor 113 door abnormality signal output device 120 stop button sensor 130 medal detection sensor 140 bet button sensor 150 step setting section 160 sub-control section 161 ROM
162 RAMs
165 credit control unit 166 data input circuit 300 sandwich device 310 banknote insertion unit 320 data display unit 321 cash value display unit 322 credit value display unit 330 operation unit 331 10 key 332 return button 333 switch button 334 payout button 340 card insertion unit

Claims (2)

A gaming system for enabling a game to be played by a gaming machine that provides a predetermined game point when a prize is won as a result of executing a game, the gaming system being connected to the gaming machine to play the game including a gaming device that converts points into points,
The game machine includes a main control unit that controls execution of the game, a game point control unit that controls communication of information about the game device and the game points,
and
The main control unit is capable of bi-directional communication with the game point control unit, and transmits a plurality of game state commands to the game point control unit according to the game state of the game machine, and at each predetermined interrupt cycle. There is a constant command to be sent to the game point control unit in
When the game point control unit receives either the game state command or the constant command from the main control unit, communication between the currently accumulated game points and the game device is normal. including information on whether or not in one command and transmitting it to the main control unit;
A game system characterized by A gaming machine that gives predetermined game points when a prize is won as a result of executing a game, the gaming machine being connectable to a gaming device that converts the game points into points,
The game machine includes a main control unit that controls execution of the game, a game point control unit that controls communication of information about the game device and the game points,
and
The main control unit is capable of bi-directional communication with the game point control unit, and transmits a plurality of game state commands to the game point control unit according to the game state of the game machine, and at each predetermined interrupt cycle. There is a constant command to be sent to the game point control unit in
When the game point control unit receives either the game state command or the constant command from the main control unit, communication between the currently accumulated game points and the game device is normal. including information on whether or not in one command and transmitting it to the main control unit;
A game machine characterized by

Images